Quarterlytics / Technology / Software - Infrastructure / SDL plc

SDL plc

sdl · LSE Technology
Claim this profile
Ticker sdl
Exchange LSE
Sector Technology
Industry Software - Infrastructure
Employees 1001-5000
← All annual reports
FY2015 Annual Report · SDL plc
Sign in to download
Loading PDF…
www.sdl.com

Annual Report

2015

2015

has been an important 
year in the evolution  
of our company.

Contents

Strategic Report

Governance

Financial Statements

  4 

 Executive Chairman’s Review 

 28 

 Board of directors 

 65 

  Independent Auditor’s Report

  6 

 Our Markets

 13 

 Principal risks and uncertainties

 16 

 Operating and Financial Review 

 20 

 Corporate Social responsibility
 People
  Foundation
  Environment

 30 

 Corporate governance report
   Corporate governance statement
   Audit Committee

  Nomination Committee

 42 

 Directors’ remuneration report
 Statement by the Chairman of the 
Remuneration Committee

   Annual report on remuneration

  Policy report

 59 

 Director’s report

 68 

 Consolidated financial 
statements and related notes  

 100   Company financial statements 

and related notes 

 110   Five Year Summary

111   Corporate Information

3

Strategic ReportStrategic Report 
  
 
  
 
  
 
 
 
 
 
  
 
  
 
 
  
Executive Chairman’s Review 

2015 has been an important year in the evolution of our company.

1

2

3

4

5

Our in-house translators working in our network office 
structure  across  38  countries  are  valued  by  clients 
because  direct  access  to  this  in-house,  in-country 
organisation  enhances  quality.    It  also  enables  local 
management  of  any  freelancer  usage,  meaning 
tighter control and lower cost to SDL.

We  have  many  global  enterprise  Language  Services 
and  Technology  customers  across  diverse  end-
markets  with  high 
levels  of  recurring  revenues. 
Our  high  penetration  and  repeat  business  of  our 
Translation Management System strategically embeds 
SDL  within  our  customer  workflow  processes  and 
our Translation Productivity platform is used by over 
225,000 translators and localisation project managers 
worldwide.

Our brand is best known for its language related offers 
with  a  reputation  for  high-quality  and  both  Trados 
and  Tridion  are  strong  brands  within  their  market 
segments. 

Our  global  content  technologies  build  upon  our 
language  DNA  and  provide  scalable  and  secure 
solutions  which  are  unique  in  their  ability  to  deal 
with  the  complexity  associated  with  managing  and 
delivering content on a global scale.

Our loyal staff who embrace change and are willing to 
respond to challenges and seize opportunities.

To  deliver  substantial  growth  in  our  chosen  markets  it  is 
important that we concentrate our investments in these areas.

As  a  result  of  our  decision  to  refocus  the  business  around 
a  language  centric  strategy,  we  have  concluded  that  some 
of  our  existing  businesses  may  be  more  successful  under 
different  ownership.    Consequently  there  are  a  number  of 
good businesses within SDL that serve growth markets but are 
non-core to our future strategy.  These businesses, Fredhopper, 
Social Intelligence, and Campaign & Analytics, will be sold.

Dividend

The financial results for the year and confidence in the future 
have enabled the Board to recommend a full year dividend of 

3.1 pence, an increase of 24% on last year.

Our board 

In October 2015, our founder and CEO, Mark Lancaster, stepped 
down  from  the  Board.    Since  founding  the  business  in  1992, 
Mark and his team led the Company through an extraordinary 
period of growth to a global market leadership position.  The 
Board would like to thank Mark for his vision and leadership in 
building the business.  

2015 performance 

2015  has  been  an  important  year  in  the  evolution  of  our 
company. 
  Our  Language  Services  business  has  further 
consolidated  its  position  as  one  of  the  leading  players  in 
the  Global  Localisation  market.    Indeed,  our  profitability  has 
reached  record  levels  as  a  result  of  our  excellent  customer 
satisfaction and our exceptional quality.  Repeat business is at 
very high levels and our business model, utilising our unique 
network  of  local  offices  and  people,  is  enabling  us  to  deliver 
extremely strong, profitable, growth. 

Since  the  acquisition  of  Alterian  plc  in  early  2012  we  have 
been  investing  in  both  technology  and  sales  and  marketing 
in order to access the global market for Customer Experience 
Management,  CXM.    Whilst  considerable  progress  has  been 
made we have been disappointed in the overall results.  This 
was due to SDL’s focus of investing in and selling consolidated 
integrated platforms whereas the market continues to favour 
the purchase of specialist point solutions.  As a result, our CXM 
strategy  has  failed  to  gain  traction,  resulting  in  a  significant 
decline in new technology bookings in our CXM business, with 
a commensurate increase in losses from these products. 

Operational review 

Following my appointment as Executive Chairman in October 
2015 the Board has conducted a thorough operational review 
of the Group’s activities. We have concluded that the business 
should  refocus  around  a  language  centric  strategy,  helping 
brands to manage, translate and deliver localised content on 
a global scale.

The Board also concluded that we have a number of significant 
areas of strength and opportunity which will form the building 
blocks of this future strategy: 

4

Annual Report 2015As  a  result,  I  was  appointed  to  the  interim  role  of  Executive 
Chairman whilst a thorough search takes place for a new CEO. 

CEO succession is a critical issue and the Nomination Committee 
is currently working with an international Executive search firm 
to  find  the  candidate  with  the  right  talents,  experience  and 
skills required to lead SDL’s future growth.

Outlook 

In  conclusion,  we  are  excited  by  the  growth  potential  for 
SDL.  Global market expansion coupled with the explosion of 
digital  content  and  growing  consumer  expectations  provide 
the  opportunity  for  SDL  to  become  a  more  strategic  vendor 
to our customers.   We must ensure that SDL fully maximises 
this  opportunity  to  become  a  trusted  advisor  for  brands  and 
businesses  looking  to  expand  their  global  reach  in  today’s 
digital  world.    In  the  short  term  we  will  continue  to  drive 
efficiency within our business in order to invest in the platforms 
we need for future growth.

As a result, the Board remain confident of another year of profit 
growth.

David Clayton
Executive Chairman

Executive Chairman's Review

Revenue 
£266.9 million 

( 2014: £260.4 million at  
reported currency)

Profit before tax,  
amortisation and one-offs 
£20.6 million

( 2014: £16.5 million)

Adjusted Earnings   
per share of  
16.13 pence

(2014: 15.10 pence)

Dividend  
per share of  
3.1 pence

(2014: 2.5 pence per share)

5

Strategic ReportStrategic Report 
 
 
Our Markets

Perhaps  the  most  important  conclusion  that  we  drew 
from  the  operational  review,  was  to  reinforce  both  the 
attractiveness  of  the  global  Localization  market  and  the 
strength  of  SDL’s  position  within  it.  Our  strategic  focus  for 
the past few years has been on building out our Customer 
Experience Management technology solutions and focussing 
our  language  business  to  deliver  enhanced  profitability 
rather  than  growth.  As  a  result  we  have  under-invested  in 
and under-delivered on our core language opportunity.

The continuing growth in digital content and the need to deliver 
this  rapidly  across  international  markets  provides  significant 
opportunity for technology driven language solutions that can 
accelerate global content delivery. 

With  our  unique  combination  of  language  services  and 
translation  technology,  coupled  with  our  global  content 
technologies,  we  see  huge  opportunity  for  SDL  to  manage, 
translate  and  deliver  localised  content  on  a  global  scale  and 
capitalise on what is a large and growing global market.

Language Services

The language services market remains a diverse and attractive 
market  with  high  potential  opportunity  for  growth  and 
development.  The market was estimated in 2015 to have been 
worth  $38bn;  with  a  current  estimated  addressable  market 
for SDL of c. £4bn.  The language services market is currently 
growing at 6-8% per annum and is estimated to grow to $43bn 
by the end of 2019.

SDL offers a full range of language services including translation, 
media services, iMT (Machine Translation (“MT”) post-editing), 
global  Search  Engine  Optimisation  and  software  localisation 
and testing.  These are delivered by 1000+ in-house, in-country 
translation experts and powered by our language technology.

There are a number of key factors that continue to drive 
expansion  and  the  need  for  innovation  in  the  language 
services market:

1.  Global market expansion 

The  removal  of  global  trade  barriers,  technological 
advancements  and  an  expanding  digital  economy 
is  leading  organisations  in  all  sectors  to  expand  their 
international  operations  and  open  up  new  global 
markets.  This has led to an increase in the need for new 
and existing language support.

2.  Digital content explosion

The  rise  of  new  digital  content  and  disciplines  such  as 
multimedia  use,  digital  and  content  marketing,  online 
documentation,  self-serve  help  and  support  drives  a 
growing  volume  of  content  needing  to  be  delivered  to 
international audiences.

3.  Growing consumer expectations

The need to deliver instant access to relevant, personalised 
local 
information,  across  all  channels  and  devices, 
language requires quicker time to market. 

in 

4.  Delivering a relevant customer experience
  Customer experience is now a key differentiator for many 
organisations.    Delivering  content  consistently  across 
languages and cultures, whilst maintaining brand control 
and local relevance is now a priority in engaging global 
audiences.

5.  International regulatory requirements

Taking  products  and  services  to  international  markets 
requires  compliance  with  local  regulations  and  laws. 
In  highly  regulated  industries  this  includes  meeting 
stringent  rules  for  providing  timely  information  in  local 
languages.

2020

40 –

35 –

30 –

25 –

20 –

15 –

10 –

50 –

0 –

6

$38.16

billion market 
in 2015

6.46% in 2015

6.13% in 2014

INDUSTRY SUPPORTED BY DRAMATIC TRENDS ($ in trillions)
•  Global international trade grew by ~19% in 2010 and ~18% in 2011 as 

5.13% in 2013

economies began to stabilize following the global recession
Increased global trade drives growing localisation needs
Expected to grow at a 7.3% CAGR from 2014-2020

• 
• 

1980

1980

1985

1990

1995

2000

2005

2010

2015

2020

l

A
c
c
e
e
r
a
t
i
n
g
a
n
d
s
i
g
n
fi
c
a
n
t
g
r
o
w
t
h

i

Annual Report 2015 
 
 
 
 
 
 
These  market  forces  will  continue  to  grow  and  SDL’s  unique 
combination of technology and language services gives us exciting 
opportunities.   Technology  plays  a  crucial  role  in  managing  the 
increase in volume, variety and velocity of local language content 
needed to do business in today’s global markets.

SDL’s  technology-enabled  language  services  drive  efficiency  in 
the speed and cost of translation, whilst maintaining consistency 
and quality.  Translation memory allows for the reuse of previously 
translated  content  while  machine  translation  is  integrated  for 
increased  automation.    Our  translation  management  solution 
integrates  into  content  systems  and  allows  organisations  to 
handle  the  growing  complexity  in  both  the  content  landscape 
and in operationalising international content creation. 

Although  there  is  widespread  demand  for  language  services 
across all industries and geographies, there are a number of areas 
where  we  believe  there  is  significant  additional  opportunity  for 
SDL:

a 

 Expansion  of  our  transcreation  services  for  marketing 
professionals.  (Delivering high quality cultural adaptation of 
messages from one language to another while maintaining 
intent, style, tone and context)

b 

 Continued expansion of our commercial operations in Asia, 
particularly in support of Asia to Asia commerce 

c 

 d 

 Building out our vertical strategy launched in 2015, focusing 
on the regulated industries

 Expansion  of  our  operations  to  provide  enterprise  level 
translation capabilities to companies of all sizes 

AccorHotels is a world leading hotel operator and the market leader 
in Europe, operating in 92 countries with 180,000 employees, 290 
million visitors and 2m Facebook fans.

“ As we cement our leadership in Europe and swiftly develop our 
presence  in  emerging  countries,  we  need  to  tailor  our  brands 
to  suit  local  preferences  –  we  only  have  seconds  to  capture  a 
customer’s  attention.  Working  with  SDL  allows  us  to  deliver  a 
more unique and personalized online experience for each guest. 
We are now translating over 20 million words into 18 languages 
and can launch a new language in under two and half months!” 

Jean-Francois Collignon, Expert and Quality Unit Director, 
AccorHotels

 Our language services operating model is possibly the best in our 
industry. This is evidenced by our customer retention statistics and 
by our industry leading levels of profitability.  

Customer Satisfaction Survey 2015

94%

OVERALL SATISFACTION
I am very satisfied or satisfied with 
SDL’s translation services

98%

CUSTOMER RETENTION
I plan to continue my relationship 
with SDL

Unlike many of our competitors who exclusively use freelance 
translators  to  deliver  their  content,  SDL  operates  a  global 
network  of  55  offices  in  38  countries,  employing  1000+ 
translators  within  our  business.    Whilst  our  in-house,  in-
country  model  is  supplemented  by  the  freelance  market  to 
offer  additional  capacity  and  expertise,  the  opportunity  for 
customers to engage directly with translators in local markets 
is seen as a real additional value in partnering with SDL. 

www.thebrandusa.com

The company
Brand USA, the destination marketing organization for 
the United States, selected SDL’s Language solutions 
to enhance the quality and consistency of brand 
messages to tourists across the globe.

The challenge
Brand USA relies on SDL Language Cloud to centralize 
and automate the translation workflow initiated by 
numerous agency partners. Following the technology 
implementation, Brand USA was able to translate 
370,000 words into nine languages in the first three 
months, while benefiting from translation memory 
leverage and consistency across departments and 
multiple ad agencies. In addition, Brand USA benefits 
from SDL’s translation services for 11 languages, SEO, 
video localization and transcreation, ensuring the 
very highest possible quality of the local language 
marketing content.

The solution
“ At  Brand  USA,  we  need  to  reach  people  all  over  the 
world and encourage them to come explore the many 
diverse  travel  experiences  throughout  the  United 
States.  Essential  to  our  mission  is  to  communicate 
to  international  travellers  in  their  native  language,  to 
convey our brand message and tone with maximum 
emotional  impact.  By  consolidating  our  language 
technology  under  SDL,  we’ve  not  only  increased  our 
output and efficiency, we’ve also improved the quality 
and consistency of content.” 

Mark Lapidus, Director of Digital, Brand USA. 

The results

370,000

words translated into nine languages in the first three 
months following the technology implementation.

7

Our MarketsStrategic ReportStrategic Report 
 
 
 
Language Technology

SDL  provides  a  complete  language  technology  platform  that 
spans  the  entire  translation  ecosystem.  Whilst  the  markets 
for  these  technologies  are  relatively  small  compared  to  our 
services  business,  technology  is  a  key  differentiator  for  SDL 
and is a strategic part of our portfolio to meet the future needs 
of  the  language  market.    Our  portfolio  can  be  divided  into  3 
product areas:

1.  Machine Translation, MT:

We estimate the MT market to be £200m - £300m per annum 
with  a  growth  rate  of  15+%.    Whilst  SDL  has  a  5-7%  market 
share, we are unique amongst our language services peers in 
having  our  own  statistical  based  machine  translation  engine.  
In the pure MT market our ability to customise our MT engines 
to  meet  the  individual  needs  of  vertical  markets  and  specific 
customer requirements means we can out-perform other MT 
providers.  This  technology,  which  we  acquired  in  2010  and 
have been developing ever since, allows us to offer a full range 
of translation solutions, depending upon the content type. By 
matching  content  to  the  right  translation  method;  human, 
machine translation or post-edited machine translation we can 
provide the most time and cost effective solution.

The maturing of MT as a technology is contributing significantly 
to the growth in translated content volumes.  MT is becoming 
an  increasingly  valuable  option  in  areas  where  language  is 
repetitive,  predictable  or  well  structured.    As  well  as  being  a 
cost  effective  solution  for  the  translation  of  user  generated 
content  such  as  social  media,  blogs,  community  forums  and 
chat, which would previously not have been cost-effective to 
translate,  MT  is  also  achieving  success  in  more  challenging 
industries such as financial services.

MT has also been adopted by our own language services group 
to increase translation productivity for our clients and is utilised 
in 32% of translation projects.  In addition, we are beginning to 
develop new markets in enabling other software companies to 
embed our MT and translate their own user generated content. 

 2.  Translation Productivity, TP:

This  is  a  market  which  is  estimated  to  be  worth  around 
£35m – 40m per annum and has similar growth trends to the 
overall language industry of around 6-8% per annum with the 
associated growth of translator volumes.  

SDL  Trados  is  the  market  leading  Translation  Productivity 
platform  with  c.  70%  penetration,  chosen  by  over  225,000 
translators  and 
localization  project  managers  worldwide.  
It  is  used  by  corporations,  government  institutions,  other 
Language  Service  Providers  as  well  as  our  own  in-house 
translators  and  the  global  freelance  community.  SDL  Trados 
significantly  enhances  a  translator’s  productivity  through 
its  use  of  translation  memories  and  terminology  glossaries 
which accelerates localization and time to market, improving 
translation quality and reducing costs.

The  Translation  Productivity  set  of  software  is  not  only  the 
standard choice for translation but offers a wide range of project 
management  features  that  enable  thousands  of  localization 
teams  to  manage,  outsource,  cost  and  review  projects 
supporting the localization of billions of words every month.

www.salesforce.com

The company
A great example is Salesforce.  

The challenge
Everyday Salesforce customers see a huge volume of 
valuable content pass through its platform, but many 
colleagues are unable to read it due to language 
barriers. These language barriers can slow down 
the optimization of global content and customer 
information.

The solution

SDL’s  MT  solution  is  now  integrated  with  Salesforce, 
bridging this language gap with real-time multilingual 
collaboration  for  global  sales,  marketing  and  support 
teams.  It  unlocks  global  account  knowledge  for  a 
single  view  of  opportunities  and  customer  accounts, 
allows  instant  collaboration  between  colleagues  with 
on-demand  translation  in  more  than  100  languages, 
and  enables  service  agents  to  triage  cases  raised  in 
any  language  and  route  them  appropriately.  This 
integration  leverages  SDL  Language  Cloud,  relied  on 
by some of the world’s leading brands.

The results

Instant 

collaboration between colleagues

 100+ 

languages translated on-demand

8

Our MarketsAnnual Report 2015To  accelerate  growth  and  expand  into  additional  markets, 
we are piloting programmes which enable us to tap into the 
potentially huge market of part time translators and bilingual 
people, estimated to be worth up to £10 million revenue per 
annum.  

3.  Translation Management Systems, TMS:

This  market  is  estimated  to  be  £35-45  million  revenue  per 
annum, benefiting from the same growth trends as the overall 
language industry and the need for Language Service Providers 
(“LSPs”)  and  clients  to  embed  translation  into  a  systematic 
workflow tool.  

SDL’s  Translation  Management  products  (SDL  TMS  and  SDL 
WorldServer)  are  the  number  one  and  two  most  adopted 
solutions in the market.  They enable both SDL and our customers 
to  effectively  manage  complex,  large-scale  translation  work.  
This  includes  workflow,  resource  management,  estimating, 
billing,  checking  and  verifying.  Although  our  translation 
management  products  are  well  placed  in  the  enterprise 
market we see opportunity for a more entry level solution to 
capture  a  growing  mid-market  segment.    Increased  global 
connectivity  is  allowing  companies  to  expand  internationally 
much earlier in their development.  Our SDL Language Cloud 
Managed Translation solution empowers businesses of all sizes 
to  efficiently  translate  and  manage  global  content  delivery 
and benefit from enterprise class translation technology with 
reduced overhead and complexity.

language  capabilities 

into  the  software  that 
Embedding 
content authors and managers use every day is a key strategy 
for  driving  language  technology  adoption  and  ease  of  use.  
We  have  a  number  of  integrations  with  leading  content 
management  solutions,  including  deep  integration  with  SDL 
Web and SDL Knowledge Center.  We will continue to expand 
our  integration  strategy  with  the  aim  of  making  language 
capabilities available to all. 

Collectively  our  Language  Technology  solutions  provide  an 
integrated  platform  serving  the  entire  translation  ecosystem.  
From client through to LSP to translator our language platform 
unites  the  entire  supply  chain  and  provides  efficiencies 
through streamlined workflows, ease of file and asset sharing 
and collaboration.

•  SDL Trados and MT  

Combining MT with SDL Trados creates the ideal 
environment for post-editing, driving additional efficiency 
in translation. Upcoming technology will enable mass and 
instant customisation of MT engines delivering an entirely 
new way of working between translation and MT.

•  SDL Trados and TMS

Using a TMS and Computer Aided Translation solution that 
share documents, translation memories and terminologies 
ensures seamless integration and efficiency. 

•  MT and TMS 

Existing translation memory and terminology stored within 
a  translation  management  solution  can  be  used  to  train 
company-specific  MT  engines  for  higher  quality  output.  
With  feedback  from  post-editing  the  MT  can  be  used  to 
train and improve the MT output.

www.skf.com

The company
For  over  100  years,  SKF  has  led  the  way  as  a  global 
provider  of  technology.  Representing  40  industries 
across  32  countries  –  from  motoring  to  marine, 
railways  and  aerospace  to  medical,  metals  and  food 
– the company needed a single, global online face to 
engage with its diverse customer base that spanned a 
300,000+ product range.  

The challenge
Following  recent  acquisitions  and  organic  global 
growth,  SKF  was  running  10  company  websites  as 
well  as  many  disjointed  country  sites  around  the 
world.  With  the  help  of  SDL  Web  for  centralized 
web  content  management  and  SDL’s  Translation 
Management  solution  for  localization,  SKF  was  able 
to efficiently consolidate the 10 main websites into a 
single company site in just 18 months. As a next phase, 
SKF  then  launched  60  localized  sites,  representing  37 
languages  in  just  12  months  –  6  months  faster  than 
expected.

The solution
As well as achieving its goal of presenting one face to 
the customer through an integrated digital marketing 
ecosystem,  SKF  also  achieved  15%  more  customer 
inquiries  per  year;  50%  increase  in  local  site  traffic; 
significant  costs  savings  by  reusing  50%  of  translated 
content,  and  one  centralized  web  content  master  for 
300 content managers.

The results

15% 

more customer inquiries per year

20% to 70% 

increase in local site traffic

50% 

of translated content reused, resulting in significant 
costs savings

9

Our MarketsStrategic ReportStrategic Report 
Technology  is  having  a  huge  impact  on  the  evolution  of 
the  localization  market.    More  content  can  now  be  cost-
effectively  translated.    SMEs  can  now  translate  marketing 
materials,  contracts  and  websites  to  enable  them  to  expand 
internationally  earlier  in  their  development  as  businesses.  
Marketers  are  becoming  more  demanding 
in  requiring 
local  language  versions  of  content  to  not  only  be  translated 
accurately, but also to retain the same nuance and sentiment 
as language and cultural barriers are crossed. 

to 

respond 

SDL’s  network  offices  and  technology  leaves  our  business 
these  challenges  and 
ideally  placed 
opportunities.  An inevitable extension of the requirements of 
marketers to produce local language versions of their content, 
is the requirement to deliver web sites in local language, whilst 
retaining some element of central control for efficiency.

to 

Global Content Technologies

In  today’s  digital  era,  delivery  of  multi-site,  multi-channel, 
and  multi-lingual  experiences  remain  top  priorities  for  global 
organisations.  The  challenge  though  is  striking  a  balance 
between  global  control  on  the  one  hand  –  to  ensure  brand 
consistency,  scale,  compliance,  and  time  to  market  –  and 
regional  autonomy  and  innovation  on  the  other  hand  –  to 
ensure  that  web  sites,  mobile  experiences,  and  marketing 
campaigns are localized for maximum relevance and impact.

SDL’s  global  content  technologies  build  upon  our  language 
DNA,  and  have  been  architected  from  the  ground  up  to 
support  these  requirements,  enabling  companies  to  manage 
all their marketing and technical content, translate it in context, 
and  personalise  the  delivery  of  it  across  multiple  channels. 
Our  Web  Content  Management  and  Technical  Content 
Management  solutions  are  complementary  to  our  Language 
Services  and  Language  Technology  products,  with  a  strong 
degree  of  customer  overlap  and  cross-selling  opportunities.  
While  there  are  many  content  management  vendors  in  the 
market  place  today,  our  solutions  are  unique  in  their  ability 
to  deal  with  the  complexity  associated  with  managing  and 
delivering content on a global scale. Leveraging the integration 
with our language technologies, we will continue to capitalise 
on the trend towards globalisation by helping organisations to 
go global faster. SDL has begun re-aligning the cost base of its 
Global Content Technologies business in order to bring focus 
and efficiencies to this segment.

1.  Web Content Management, WCM: 

The  market  for  Web  Content  Management  solutions 
is 
estimated  at  £1bn,  growing  at  10-15%  per  annum  with  the 
majority  of  growth  coming  from  upsell  and  replacement  of 
older generation systems. 

SDL Web, powered by Tridion, is our web content management 
platform that sits at the heart of the digital ecosystem, enabling 
businesses  to  manage  a  complex  environment  of  web 
properties  whilst  ensuring  brand  and  message  consistency. 
SDL Web  is  unique  in  its  ability  to  address  the  complexity  of 
managing  content  across  multiple  brands,  languages  and 
channels, thanks to its BluePrinting® capabilities. 

is  driven  by  organisations  that  want  to  deliver 
Growth 
content  globally,  while  retaining  brand  control  and  local 

www.blackboard.com

The company
Blackboard, long known as a leader in the Education 
Technology space, and a pioneer of the Learning 
Management System (LMS) industry, has 19,000 
clients in 190 countries. Blackboard has actively 
evolved to meet the needs of the education industry 
and expanded its business with new solutions that 
inspire the world to learn. 

The challenge
“We  wanted  to  deliver  a  web  experience  that  would 
meet  the  needs  of  both  existing  and  prospective 
customers, highlighting the solutions specific to their 
market  needs,  in  whatever  geographical  region  they 
lived,  in  whatever  language  they  spoke,  and  from 
whatever device they used.” 

Jon Gold, Director, Web Strategy & Design, Blackboard.

The solution
implementing  SDL  Web,  Blackboard  quickly 
After 
increased conversion by 14% in the first year, lowered 
its  bounce  rate  by  20%  and  experienced  an  8% 
increase  in  engagement  on  its  mobile  friendly  site. 
Blackboard  now  delivers  a  consistent,  scalable  global 
web experience to all visitors.

The results

14% 

conversion increase in the first year

20% 

lower bounce rate

8% 

increase in engagement on its mobile friendly site

10

Our MarketsAnnual Report 2015market flexibility, improve operational efficiency and decrease 
mounting  costs.  Many  organisations  that  have  grown  with 
multiple  content  management  systems  or  that  have  created 
custom systems are currently under pressure to decrease costs 
by unburdening themselves from legacy systems. In addition, 
few  organisations  have  the  agility  to  respond  to  changing 
internal  structures  due  to  acquisitions  or  changes  in  their 
business portfolios.

Significant market potential exists for organisations that need 
to  ensure  localization  efficiency.  This  process  alone  can  be 
incredibly complex with distributed teams translating content, 
managing  these  translations  in  spreadsheets  with  multiple 
in-house  and  agency  translators  and  copying  and  pasting 
translated content into various distribution channels. Needless 
to say, frequently these processes are less than optimised and 
result in difficulty in just getting content to market and creating 
a level of complexity in terms of coordinated campaigns and 
messaging. The  integration  of  SDL’s  translation  management 
technologies  with  SDL  Web  ensure  that  these  process 
inefficiencies are addressed and that translated content has a 
much faster time to market. 

2.  Technical Content Management:

The market for technical content management is estimated to 
be £240 million per annum with a growth rate of 7%. 

In 
today’s  digital  era,  users  are  expecting  product 
documentation  and  technical  content  online,  available  on 
the  web  as  well  as  mobile  devices,  and  in  the  language  of 
their  choice.  Producing  quality  documentation  and  technical 
content is complex though, as it must be informative, relevant 
and consistent. This complexity requires structure through the 
use of XML.

SDL  Knowledge  Center  stores,  organises  and  manages  all 
structured technical content in any language so it can be easily 
reused, shared, filtered and delivered to the appropriate channel.  
It  also  eliminates  the  complexity  of  XML  for  non-technical 
content creators. SDL Knowledge Center is the most powerful 
solution available for delivering multi-lingual technical content 
to  customers.  Integration  with  our  language  technology 
solutions combined with out of the box automated publishing 
ensures cost effective delivery in multiple languages.

Our  customers’  priorities  are  usability  of  content  authoring  & 
management  functionality;  advanced  content  delivery  is  not 
widely used yet, but is expected to be required in the next 5 
years.    Our  product  supports  technical  content  creators  in 
creating,  managing,  editing,  reviewing  and  delivering  highly-
structured  content.  It  is  well-rated  and  has  strong  customer 
relationships.

www.hach.com

The company
With a history dating back to 1947, and 22 subsidiaries, 
Hach manufactures analytical instruments that are used 
by experts globally to ensure the safety and quality of 
water for millions of people. Hach must produce high-
quality documentation that is technically accurate, up 
to date and available in 27 languages. With the speed 
and  number  of  product  releases  increasing  and  the 
number of supported global markets expanding, Hach 
needed to move away from its traditional, cumbersome 
processes for localization and technical writing.

The challenge
Hach selected a combined solution of SDL Translation 
Management  System  and  SDL  Knowledge  Center. 
SDL  Translation  Management  System  allowed  them 
to take control of the localization process, eliminating 
the cost of reviewing already translated sentences and 
reducing  desktop  publishing  costs.  SDL  Knowledge 
Center  provided  a  content  management  system  that 
supported multi-lingual content, provided an easy-to-
use environment, was cost-effective and offered strong  
DITA support.

The solution
This  combined  SDL  solution  decreased  translation 
cycles  from  three  months  to  15-30  days;  reduced 
translation  costs  by  60%;  cut  translation  time  by  40% 
and increased employee happiness by 80%.

The results

60% 

reduction in translation costs

40% 

cut in translation time

80% 

increase in employee happiness

11

Our MarketsStrategic ReportStrategic Reportwww.informatica.com

The company
Informatica,  a  pioneer  in  enterprise  data  integration 
technology,  set  out  with  the  goal  of  improving  time 
to  global  markets  and  efficiency 
localization. 
Informatica’s  traditional  book-based  documentation 
and  localization  processes  -  involving  writing  highly 
technical content, publishing it in various formats and 
translating  it  into  some  of  the  world’s  most  complex 
written  languages  –  had  become  cumbersome  and 
frustrating, adversely affecting budgeting and slowing 
time to market.

in 

The challenge
Informatica  introduced  SDL  Translation  Management 
System to manage the translation process and centralise 
translation  assets  and  expanded  on  the  efficiencies 
achieved  by  extending  upstream  into  the  authoring 
and content development process. Informatica moved 
to  a  structured  authoring  and  publishing  process 
using  SDL  Knowledge  Center,  supporting  DITA,  to 
streamline the process and reduce the costs associated 
with  preparing  technical  documentation  for  global 
customers.

in 

resulted 

The solution
The  combined  solution 
faster  time 
to  market 
for  global  products;  enterprise-wide 
improved  customer  experience; 
consistency  and 
improved  reuse  of  content  across  multiple  product 
lines;  reduced  global  translation  costs,  and  improved 
quality and consistency of translation management in 
a multilingual environment.

The results

Faster 

time to market for global products

Improved 

customer experience

Reduced 

global translation costs

12

Our MarketsAnnual Report 2015Principal risks and uncertainties 

The  Group  recognises  the  importance  of  identifying  and 
actively managing the financial and non-financial risks facing 
the business. The Board is responsible for setting the levels of 
acceptable risk and they participate in regularly reviewing the 
risks  and  controls  to  ensure  that  the  appropriate  mitigations 
are in place. Whilst the Board retains overall responsibility, the 
Audit  Committee,  Executive  Committee  and  all  employees 
have a part to play. Managing risk is embedded in our culture 
and how we conduct our day-to-day business activities. 

Approach to managing risk 

The Group’s risk management process is built around the risk 
register.  The  Board  has  carried  out  a  robust  assessment  of 
the principal risks facing the Group. Throughout the year the 
Board,  via  the  Audit  and  Executive  Committees,  reviews  and 
evaluates the major risks faced by the Group and the controls 
and  mitigation  plans  in  place.  The  Risk  Register  is  reviewed 
and  updated  by  the  Executive  Committee  with  risks  added, 
amended or removed as appropriate and relevant mitigation 
strategies  identified.  The  Risk  Register  is  then  presented  to 
the Board for discussion, approval and re-rating of risks where 
necessary.  Alongside  this,  the  Audit  Committee  review  the 
controls  framework  and  the  effectiveness  of  the  mitigations 
identified to manage the risks.

RISK FRAMEWORK

The Audit Committee formally reviews the system of internal 
control  and  risk  management  annually. Throughout  the  year 
ending 31 December 2015 and to date, the Group has operated 
a system of internal control that provides reasonable assurance 
of effective operations covering all controls, including financial 
and  operational  controls  and  compliance  with  laws  and 
regulations.  Processes  are  in  place  for  identifying,  evaluating 
and managing the principal risks facing the Group.

Principal risks 

The Group faces many risks and uncertainties and the system is 
designed to manage and provide reasonable assurance against 
material  misstatement  or  loss.    No  risk  management  process 
can  fully  eliminate  risk  but  the  Board  believes  that  it  has  an 
effective framework that will recognise, minimise and mitigate 
the effect of the risk should it occur. Set out over the following 
pages are the principal risks and uncertainties which we believe 
could adversely affect the SDL Group. This list is not exhaustive 
and  the  list  will  change  as  something  that  seems  immaterial 
today assumes greater importance tomorrow. In the following 
section, we outline those items we currently consider to be our 
most important risks.

Board

Audit Committee

Executive Committee

Sets strategic objective and agrees 
acceptable risk profile.

Monitors risk management policies and 
procedures against strategic objectives.

Delegates authority.

Receives and reviews risk register.

Regular review of operational and 
strategic risk: identification/analysis/
evaluation/mitigation.

Reporting to the Board and the 
Audit Committee.

Approves Group policies and procedures.

Challenges and assesses risk register.

13

Strategic ReportStrategic ReportPrincipal risks and uncertainties 

STRATEGIC RISKS

Description

Risk

Mitigation

Competition strategy – services

Revenue (and profitability) reduction.  
Services business fails to sustain 
competitive advantage.

Competition strategy – technology

Revenue reduction and technical 
obsolescence leading to loss of market 
share and early mover advantage.  
Competition from existing localisation 
industry participants and increasing 
interest from other industries. 

Maintain multilingual and network office 
structure and continue introduction and 
development of technology into translation 
process. Continually assess reasons behind 
lost sales opportunities. Keep abreast 
of industry trends and ensure services 
investment keeps SDL competitively 
positioned.  Continue to provide customers 
with a high quality and differentiated service 
at a price that they believe is good value.

Maintain controlled development strategy 
and innovation with regular review of spend, 
competition offering and new entrants.

Product integration strategy.

OPERATIONAL RISKS

Description

Risk

Mitigation

Divestment process and separation 
execution

Divesting non-core businesses:

– divestment strategy

–  road map to carve businesses out  

from continuing operations.

Project and support teams led by specialist. 
Risks and rewards associated with each 
option assessed independently.

Identify, document and quantify:
–  operational dependencies and linkages to 

the core business; 

–  consider the need for licence agreements, 

transition service arrangements etc.

Human resources

Company dependent upon the ability 
and experience of certain key employees 
in key functions.

Executive Chairman assumed role of CEO in 
October 2015.  Aim to split the role in the 
next 6-12 months.

Cyber risk

Data privacy and protection - financial 
loss, disruption or damage to the Group’s 
reputation from failure of its information 
technology systems.

Information security

Legislation/Client requirements: 

Fail to respond to emerging security 
legislation;

Backup of disaster recovery processes 
and IT security does not match customer 
requirements.

Three new Executive team members have 
been appointed, two from within the Group.

A talent management process is in place 
which identifies potential successors for key 
roles.

IT Security: Handled within the IT risk 
management framework and security teams.  
Data Security Officer appointed in 2015.

Data Privacy: Data Privacy Officer appointed 
in 2015 - currently addressing compliance 
requirements for 2018 EU regulations 
including IT infrastructure, penetration 
testing and employee training.

ISO27001 certification process includes 
audit and review of external providers’ 
capabilities.  Deficiencies are assessed as part 
of procurement processes. 

PCI guidelines are monitored and security 
upgrades implemented as appropriate.

14

Annual Report 2015Principal risks and uncertainties 

FINANCIAL RISKS

Description

Risk

Mitigation

Economic downturn

Sharp decline in business performance.

Currency movements

Trading patterns and/or intercompany 
trading / loan patterns expose the Group 
to foreign exchange risk.

Careful management of internal vs external 
sourcing of services.

Monthly reviews of activity and forecasts.

Clear reporting to the Board that sets out 
currency impacts on performance.

Controlled program of intercompany balance 
settlement in place and balance sheet 
exposure reduced.

The  Group’s  wide  geographical  and  sector  diversification 
helps  minimise  the  risk  of  serious  business  interruption  or 
catastrophic  reputational  damage.  Furthermore,  our  business 
model is structured so that the Group is not overly reliant on 
a small customer base.  Our largest customer constitutes only 
4% of Group sales and our top 20 clients account for less than 
22% of Group sales.  

Based  on  the  results  of  this  analysis,  the  Directors  have  a 
reasonable expectation that the Group will be able to continue 
in  operation  and  meet  its  liabilities  as  they  fall  due  over  the 
three-year period of their assessment.

Viability statement 

In accordance with provision C.2.2 of the 2014 revision of the 
UK  Corporate  Governance  Code,  the  Directors  have  assessed 
the prospects of the Group over a longer period than the 12 
months required by the ‘Going Concern’ provision.

The  Board  conducted  this  review  for  a  period  of  three  years, 
taking  into  account  the  Group’s  current  position  and  the 
potential impact of the principal risks and uncertainties set out 
above.

Based on this assessment, the Directors confirm that they have 
a  reasonable  expectation  that  the  company  will  be  able  to 
continue  in  operation  and  meet  its  liabilities  as  they  fall  due 
over the period to December 2018.

This is the period focussed on by the Board during the strategic 
planning process and the Group’s customers do not typically 
contract for a term in excess of this period. Whilst the Directors 
have  no  reason  to  believe  the  Group  will  not  be  viable  over 
a  longer  period,  given  the  inherent  uncertainty  involved 
we  believe  this  presents  users  of  the  Annual  Report  with  a 
reasonable degree of confidence while still providing a longer-
term perspective.

The Board also considers the ability of the Group to raise finance 
and deploy capital. The results take account of the availability 
and  likely  effectiveness  of  the  mitigating  actions  that  could 
be taken to avoid or reduce the impact or occurrence of the 
underlying risks.

The  review  has  considered  all  the  principal  risks  identified 
by  the  Group  and  although  not  considered  principal  risks, 
the  following  were  focussed  on  for  enhanced  stress  testing: 
Group’s cash flows and debt requirements, banking covenant 
headroom and dividend cover over the period. These metrics 
are  subject  to  sensitivity  analysis  which  involves  flexing  a 
number of the main assumptions underlying the forecast both 
individually and in unison. 

15

Strategic ReportStrategic ReportOperating and Financial Review

Summary Performance

2015 has been a been a year of differing progress with excellent  
margin  performance  in  our  Language  Services  business,  but 
disappointing  new  bookings  performance  in  our Technology 
businesses.

Revenues for 2015 were £266.9 million (2014: £260.4 million). 
Profit  before  taxation,  amortisation  of  intangible  assets  and 
one-off costs (“PBTA”) was £20.6 million (2014: £16.5 million). The 
loss after tax amounted to £30.7 million, after an impairment 
charge of £33.3 million and other one-off costs of £5.8 million 
(2014: profit after tax, £6.6 million)

ROW

Gross  cash  in  the  business  at  the  year-end  was  £17.2  million 
(2014: £22.1 million) and net cash after borrowings was £12.4 
million (2014: £13.1 million).

Canada

Revenue in the year increased by 2%. Geographically, Asia grew 
by 20%, North America by 8% and Europe was down by 3%.

USA

Language  Services  continues  to  deliver  revenue  growth 
and  increased  margins  with  significant  progress  in  gross  and 
operating  margins.  This  segment  delivered  gross  margins  of 
47.3% (2014: 45.5%) and PBTA margin of 19.9% (2014: 16.4%).

Europe

Total  bookings 
disappointing year, down 5% at constant currency.

from  our  technology  segments  had  a 

UK

Cash generated from operations was £12.0 million (2014: £22.2 
million).  Cash  generation  in  the  year  has  been  impacted  by 
cash  outflows  associated  with  the  restructuring  programme 

and  2014  staff  incentive  payments.  Capital  expenditure  was 
£2.7 million (2014: £2.4 million). Tax paid was £5.8 million (2014: 
£3.9 million).

The  business  continues  to  benefit  from  a  diverse  mix  of 
regions, industry verticals and customers, limiting the Group’s 
exposure to adverse economic conditions in certain countries 
and sectors. Customer concentration is in line with prior year 
with the 20 largest customers contributing 22% (2014: 26%) of 
revenue in 2015. No single customer contributes more than 4% 
of Group revenues. Our largest customer was Microsoft, but we 
lost the majority of this account towards the end of 2015 due 
to unattractive pricing.

Performance by Segment

Following the operational review, the Group has four operating 
segments;  Language  Services,  Language  Technology,  Global 
Content Technologies and the Non-Core businesses.   During the 
year the Group has revised its internal revenue and cost recharge 
and allocation methodologies to better reflect how services and 
costs are consumed by each segment. The impact of this change 
has  been  to  recognise  additional  internal  revenue  recharges 
of £3.8 million and to reallocate costs of £1.3 million between 
Language Services and Language Technology segments in 2015.  
In accordance with IFRS8, the operating segments and internal 
recharges  for  the  comparative  period  have  been  restated  to 
provide consistent and meaningful information. 

Geographical analysis of external revenue by destination:

by destination %

by destination £m

12%

16%

5%

15%

15%

5%

2015

32%

33%

33%

34%

£31.2m

£41.7m

£13m

£39.9m

£39.4m

£14.3m

2015

£86.3m

£87.1m

£85.9m

£88.5m

2014

2014

USA

UK

Canada

Europe

ROW

16

Annual Report 2015Operating and Financial Review

Language Services 

(contributing  £152.8  million  or  57%  of  total  revenue  and  £30.4 
million of PBTA) (2014: £146.8 million or 56% of total revenue and 
£24.1 million of PBTA).

2015  saw  a  solid  performance  within  Language  Services 
achieving  a  4%  increase  in  revenue.    PBTA  margin  increased 
3.5% to 19.9% (2014: 16.4%).

Customers remain at the heart of everything we do. The division 
achieved  a  94%  customer  satisfaction  rate  in  2015,  matching 
that achieved in 2014.  Repeat revenues (revenue earned from 
existing customers) increased by 3.5% at constant currency.

In  2015,  we  continued  our  ongoing  investment  in  people, 
as  we  continue  to  build  a  highly  skilled  and  experienced 
workforce  with  particular  emphasis  on  project  management 
training  and  vertical  market  expertise. This  supported  a  new 
vertical  market  strategy  introduced  during  2015,  which  saw 
the  soft  launch  of  8  vertical  language  technology  platforms 
with particular focus on the Life Sciences and Travel industries.  
This investment, which will continue in 2016, has resulted in a 
number of strategic new account wins in 2015 which will build 
revenue in 2016 and beyond.  

Operational efficiency remains a core focus in driving margin 
performance  and  we  increased  our  utilisation  of  low  cost 
centres of excellence for back office and support functions.  We 
also continued our “Technology Enabled Services” program to 
continue to automate and optimise processes with the rollout 
of SDL Groupshare.  These initiatives helped drive an increase 
in gross margin rate.

Good  progress  in  our  regional  operations  has  also  been 
achieved:

•  New  leadership  and  a  restructuring  of  sales  in  North 
America led to 152% new business growth and over 90 new 
customer wins which drove revenue up by 18%.

•  APAC  continued  to  experience  strong  growth  with  an 
overall  revenue  increase  of  9%.   This  was  driven  by  a  7% 
increase  in  the  growth  of  existing  business  and  a  19% 
increase in new revenue generation. 

• 

The  EMEA  market  experienced  some  price  pressure  from 
legacy customers and high inflation in Southern and Eastern 
European  countries  resulting  in  a  revenue  contraction  of 
3%.  Despite these economic challenges, the gross margin 
was maintained. 

New  client  wins  include  ADAMA,  Akami,  Actoz  Soft,  Huawei, 
Incheon Airport, I-ON Communications, Kaeser Kompressoren 
SE, Mitsubishi Electric, Office Depot, Polaris Office and Tetra Pak 
Korea.

Language Technology 

(contributing  £36.7  million  or  14%  of  revenue  and  £1.3  million 
PBTA) (2014: contributing £37.4 million or 14% of revenue and £5.1 
million PBTA).

Our  Language  Technology  total  bookings  increased  3%  at 
constant currency.  Renewal bookings grew 6% which helped 
drive annual recurring revenue up by 5% at constant currency.

Reported  revenue  fell  2%.    PBTA  margin  fell  10.0%  to  3.5% 
(2014: 13.5%).

Although  our  Translation  Management  products  group 
increased  revenue  by  8%,  we  did  see  a  down-turn  in  our  US 
Government business.  This was partly planned as we refocused 
our Machine Translation research group activities on increasing 
the quality of output from our Machine Translation products for 
our core customers and away from external research projects.  
Underlying performance was also below expectations and this 
business underwent a restructuring at the end of 2015.

SDL’s  Translation  Productivity  tools  are  used  by  70%  of  the 
world’s  professional  translators  and  we  are  very  pleased 

17

Strategic ReportStrategic ReportOperating and Financial Review

that  our  product  commitment  scores  for  SDL  Trados  Studio 
increased by 37% in 2015.  Investment in new market entry also 
began to show dividends in 2015 with new sales in India and 
Singapore  and  sales  growth  in  South  Korea.  Overall  revenue 
was up 8% but was impacted by instability in the Eurozone and 
geopolitical issues in the Middle East and Russia.

2015  saw  the  launch  of  5  major  product  and  technology 
releases: SDL Language Cloud Managed Translation, XMT, SDL 
WorldServer 11, SDL TMS 11 and SDL Trados Studio 2015.   Each 
of  these  followed  a  theme  of  improved  User  Experience  and 
Connectivity,  feeding  into  our  strategy  of  making  language 
technology  capabilities  more  easily  accessible  than  ever 
before. We also established a number of strategic partnerships 
including  embedding  our  machine  translation  capabilities 
into salesforce.com and establishing connectors to a number 
of  leading  content  solutions  including  WordPress,  Drupal 
and  Adobe  Experience  Manager  as  well  as  strengthening 
integration with our own SDL Web and SDL Knowledge Centre 
content platforms.

New  client  wins  include  Brand  USA,  Kaspersky  Lab,  Next  IT, 
Office  Depot,  PayPal,  Inc.,  Rentalcars.com,  Symantec  and 
YarnTree.

Global Content Technologies 

(contributing  £50.9  million  or  19%  of  revenue  and  losses  of  £1.5 
million PBTA) (2014: contributing £51.4 million or 20% of revenue 
and losses of £1.5 million PBTA).

Our  Global  Content  Technologies  total  bookings  fell  10%  at 
constant currency.  Renewal bookings grew by 20% following 
good new licence bookings performance in 2014.   However, 
2015  new  license  bookings  were  down  47%  which  led  to 
restructuring and refocusing of the sales and marketing teams 
in July and in early 2016.  Annual recurring revenue was flat at 
constant currency.

Reported  revenue  fell  1%.  Loss  before  tax,  amortisation  and 
one-off  costs  was  in  line  with  last  year  at  £1.5  million  (2014: 
£1.5 million).

In 2015, we released new versions of SDL Web, SDL Knowledge 
Center  and  SDL  Contenta  Publishing  Suite  and  we  have 
continued  to 
integration  of  our  Language 
Technology  into  all  our  GCT  products.  Key  new  product 
developments included:

improve  the 

• 

• 

• 

SDL  Web  developments  introduce  a  site  launch  wizard, 
simplified 
into  e-commerce  systems,  new 
cloud  capabilities  and  the  product  achieved  ISO  27001 
certification.

integration 

SDL Knowledge Center now integrates 3rd party taxonomy 
solutions,  makes  content  from  disparate  sources  more 
accessible  from  one  self-service  experience  and  increases 
the relevance of technical communications.

SDL  Contenta  Publishing  Suite  developments  now  allow 
users to master the creation, management and delivery of 
content  for  companies  using  the  S1000D  aerospace  and 
defense specification.

18

New  client  wins  include  Alfa  Laval  AB,  Canon,  China  Airlines, 
Cymer  Inc,  DAF  Trucks  NV,  Folksam  AB,  and  Philips  Medical 
Systems Nederland BV.

Non-Core businesses 

(contributing  £26.5  million  or  10%  of  revenue  and  losses  of  £9.6 
million PBTA) (2014: contributing £24.8 million or 10% of revenue 
and losses of £11.2 million PBTA).

Our Non-Core businesses include our Fredhopper, Campaign & 
Analytics and Social Intelligence businesses.  These businesses 
operate  in  fast  growing  markets  (20-35%  annual  growth) 
but  these  businesses  are  not  closely  related  to  our  future 
language centric strategy.  As such, the Board has announced 
our intention to sell these businesses to owners better able to 
invest in and support their future growth.

In 2015, total bookings fell 6% at constant currency.  Renewal 
bookings  increased  by  1%  and  2015  new  bookings  were 
down 23%.  Annual recurring revenue was up 1% at constant 
currency.

Reported  revenue  grew  7%,  principally  driven  by  our 
Fredhopper business which grew 15% in 2015.  Loss before tax, 
amortisation and one-off costs remained high at £9.6 million 
(2014: £11.2 million).

New  client  wins  include  Bakker  Hillegom  BV,  Eight  Dragons 
Digital, Hillarys Blinds, Kikki.K Pty Ltd, Kurt Geiger, Missguided, 
Snowleader and The Association of Mature American Citizens. 

Gross Margin

The  Group’s  gross  margin  was  in  line  with  last  year  at  56.2% 
(2014: 56.6%).

Administrative Expenses

Administrative  costs  excluding  intangibles  amortisation  and 
one-off costs decreased in 2015 to £129.3 million (2014: £130.7 
million).

Research  and  development  costs  of  £26.9  million  (2014: 
£27.6 million) are included in administrative expenses. During 
the  year,  the  Group  issued  13  product  releases  with  greater 
functionality being deployed. In addition, we have adopted a 
continuous  release  programme  for  our  SaaS  products  which 
improves  our  customers’  experience  by  delivering  releases 
quicker and more effectively than in prior years.

Development costs have been reviewed and the Board remains 
of  the  opinion  that  capitalisation  criteria  under  International 
Accounting  Standard  (IAS)  38  are  not  met.  Consequently  no 
development costs are capitalised on the balance sheet.

Average headcount during the year increased to 3,504 (2014: 
3,245). The  Group  has  continued  to  recruit  employees  in  low 
cost locations to optimise operational efficiencies.   Employee 
related costs remain the most significant component of Group 
costs,  amounting  to  69%  of  Group  overheads  (2014:  66%) 
excluding amortisation of intangibles and one-off costs.

Annual Report 2015Intangible assets ascribed to certain of the Group’s software and 
customer relationships arising from acquisitions are amortised 
over periods of between 5 and 10 years and the carrying value 
is formally reviewed on an annual basis to assess whether there 
are indicators of impairment. The intangible asset amortisation 
charge in 2015 was £6.7 million (2014: £7.1 million).

One-off items

Intangible  assets  and  goodwill  were  allocated  to  six  Cash 
Generating Units (“CGU”) namely Language Services, Language 
Technology, Global Content Technologies and the three Non-
Core  businesses.  Following  the  poor  new  licence  bookings 
performance of the Group’s technology CGUs and the Group’s 
operational review, the 2015 impairment review resulted in an 
impairment of £33.3 million across the Language Technology 
and Non-Core CGUs (2014: nil).

In  addition  to  this  impairment,  the  Group  has  incurred  £5.8 
million  of  other  one-off  costs  in  the  year.  These  costs  relate 
to:  redundancy  and  retention  costs  associated  with  the 
reorganisation  of  the  Group  in  2015;  professional  fees  and 
related  charges  associated  with  the  operational  review; 
corporate consolidation exercises carried out in the year; and 
provision for one-off tax liabilities.

Earnings Per Share

Basic earnings per share when adjusted for one-off costs and 
amortisation of intangibles (“adjusted EPS”) increased by 7% to 
16.13 pence (2014: 15.10 pence). Basic earnings per share was a 
loss of 37.93 pence (2014: profit of 8.03 pence).

Financing Costs

Interest  costs  in  2015  were  £0.1  million  (2014:  £0.4  million). 
At  the  start  of  the  year,  drawn  borrowings  were  £9.0  million. 
During  2015,  we  repaid  these  borrowings  to  Royal  Bank  of 
Scotland and drew down £4.8 million under the Group’s new 5 
year banking facility with HSBC plc.

Cash flow

The Group generated £12.0 million from operations during the 
year (2014: £22.2 million). This cash inflow was net of £3.8 million 
of  exceptional  cash  outflows  arising  from  our  restructuring 
activities and 2014 staff incentive payments.

Surplus cash, after deducting net income tax paid of £5.8 million 
(2014:  £3.9  million)  and  investing  activities  of  £2.9  million 
(2014: £2.6 million), has been used to reduce the Group’s bank 
borrowings by £4.2 million and pay a dividend of £2.0 million to 
shareholders. The Group’s bank borrowings of £4.8 million have 
been fully repaid in 2016.

As a result net cash reduced slightly to £12.4 million at year end 
(2014: £13.1 million).

Borrowing Facilities

During the year, the Group signed a new £25 million committed 
revolving credit facility with HSBC plc, expiring in August 2020. 

Operating and Financial Review

The agreement also includes a £25m uncommitted Accordian 
facility.

Pricing of this £25 million borrowing facility is between 1.15% 
and  1.9%  above  LIBOR  dependent  upon  the  ratio  of  the 
Group’s total net debt to its adjusted earnings before interest, 
tax,  depreciation  and  amortisation.  Under  the  credit  facility 
agreement, SDL is subject to certain financial covenants which 
are required to be tested quarterly. These covenants relate to 
Adjusted  EBITDA:  Net  Finance  Charges  and  Total  Net  Debt: 
Adjusted EBITDA.

Derivatives and other Financial Instruments

The  Group  has  cash  and  short-term  deposits  of  varying 
durations to fund its working capital needs and other financial 
assets  and  liabilities  such  as  trade  receivables  and  trade 
payables  arising  directly  from  its  operations.  The  Group’s 
policy is that no active trading in financial instruments will be 
undertaken within the operating units and all decisions on use 
of financial instruments will be taken at Group level under the 
direction of the Chief Financial Officer.

Taxation

SDL is a global business and, as such, the Group’s effective tax 
rate  is  heavily  influenced  by  the  territorial  mix  of  operating 
profits  earned  together  with  management  judgement  of  the 
extent to which the Group’s tax losses are likely to be utilised 
with  reasonable  certainty.  A  detailed  analysis  of  the  taxation 
charge  is  included  in  note  5  to  the  preliminary  financial 
information.

The tax charge for the year is £5.5 million (2014: £2.8 million). 
This charge includes tax credits associated with amortisation, 
deferred tax and tax on one-off costs.  The underlying current 
effective  tax  rate  during  the  year  was  36.2%  (2014:  35.8%) 
as  a  result  of  unrelieved  tax  losses  arising  in  a  number  of 
jurisdictions.

Trados Litigation update

The  Group  has  settled  the  litigation  related  to  the  Trados 
acquisition. A payment of $1.85 million was made in February 
2016 in full and final settlement of all claims.

Dividend

A  final  dividend  for  the  year  ended  31  December  2015  of 
3.1  pence  per  share  will  be  proposed  at  the  Annual  General 
Meeting, an increase of 24% on the prior year.

Dominic Lavelle
Chief Financial Officer

19

Strategic ReportStrategic ReportCorporate Responsibility

People

Our  people  are  central  to  the  delivery  of  every  aspect  of  our 
Group  strategy.    It  is  important  that  we  attract,  develop  and 
engage them. 

Our  strategy  for  developing  a  strong  culture  of  capable, 
motivated employees is in the following sections.

People  are  our  greatest  assets  and  we  are  committed  to 
providing  a  high  quality  working  environment  which  is  not 
only productive and rewarding, but also enjoyable.  Our people 
programme  is  designed  to  ensure  that  our  employees  are 
informed,  listened  to,  develop  skills  and  open  up  rewarding 
career opportunities.  

Culture and Communication

During 2015, SDL continued to roll out company-wide global 
business applications and invested in key areas of the business 
which underpin SDL’s commitment to its people strategy:   

•  Monthly  company  update  presentations  by  the  Executive 

Chairman to all employees; 

•  Monthly  newsletter  sharing  company-wide  programmes 
as  well  as  local  initiatives  and  employee  news  with  all 
employees;

•  Company Intranet, the ‘Hub’, created to enable employees to 
connect more easily with colleagues and share information 
including access to SDL’s policies;

•  Yammer,  a  social  networking  tool  for  the  business,  where 
employees can set  up groups to discuss  particular  topics, 
post questions and help answer each other’s queries. Since 
the launch in August 2015, 180 yammer groups have been 
created and 7,752 messages posted;

• 

Site  Leaders,  appointed  to  lead  every  SDL  office  cascade 
messages at a local level and solicit feedback;

•  Works councils, round table and other employee forums  to 

enable discussions of performance and other issues;  

•  A  whistleblowing  policy 

in  place  which  enables 
is 
employees to bring matters of concern to the attention of 
the Senior Independent Director in confidence. No matters 
were raised via this route in 2015. The Board are reviewing 
the  current  procedures  and  practices  for  dealing  with 
whistleblowing  claims  to  ensure  that  potential  issues  are 
captured and addressed as early as possible; and

• 

SDL  supports  overseas  assignments  or  secondment  to 
enable  employees  to  benefit  from  a  period  overseas. 
We  have  also  seen  continued  movement  of  employees 
across  different  operating  segments,  which  is  effective 
in  transferring  best  practice  and  sustaining  culture.    In 
2015  we  had  21  employees  transfer  to  a  different  office 
location  compared  with  9  employees  in  2014.  Most  of 
these  employees  were  engineers,  sales  representatives, 
consultants and project managers.

Employment Policies

The  SDL  Code  of  Conduct,  applicable  to  all  employees  and 
those who work for or on behalf of SDL, sets out the standards of 
behaviour expected in relation to areas such as insider dealing, 
bribery  and  raising  concerns  through  the  whistleblowing 
process.  Our  employment  policies  are  developed  to  reflect 
local  legal,  cultural  and  employment  requirements  whilst 
complying with Group principles of integrity.

The Chief Financial Officer has ultimate responsibility for Health 
and Safety. Specific tasks are delegated to local office managers 
and suitably trained individuals in the organisation. The Group 
rejects all forms of discrimination and actively encourages an 
equal opportunities policy. We expressly prohibit discrimination 
on grounds such as sex, race, religion or belief, age or perceived 
age, sexual orientation or disability.

Employees

2014

3,245 Employees

2015

3,504 Employees

20

Annual Report 2015Talent and development

In order to drive substantial growth in our language and global 
content  technologies  businesses  and  become  the  unrivalled 
global leader in a competitive global market we seek to retain 
and build the best skills and knowledge in the market.

We  are  working  towards  achieving  this  ambitious  goal  by 
providing  a  variety  of  ways  to  develop  at  SDL—eLearning, 
instructor-led training, feedback, coaching and mentoring, and 
various on-the-job experiences.  Our focus and commitment is 
on helping employees perform at their very best and achieve 
their full potential. 

Our learning and development strategy includes:

•  Performance Management:  

Employees are encouraged to engage in frequent dialogue 
with  their  manager  throughout  the  year  to  understand 
how  their  work  aligns  with  the  goals  of  their  department 
and to gain feedback and coaching on their performance;

•  Learning:  

In  2015  SDL  launched  MyLX  (My  Learning  Experience), 
a  learning  management  system  that  serves  as  our  one 
source for all internal learning. The online platform enables 
employees  to  learn  what  they  want,  when  they  want, 
wherever  they  are.  Employees  have  access  to  a  variety  of 
learning  assets,  including  product  training,  professional 
development  courses,  business  applications 
training 
and  over  2,000  desktop  video  courses  through  Skillsoft.  
Additional  Skillsoft  content  is  provided  to  people  within 
certain roles, along with learning plans that are aligned to 
the business needs;

•  Leadership Development

Our  Management  Development  Programme  (MDP)  was 
consolidated  and  updated  in  2015,  creating  a  compact 
and agile programme. Overall, a total of 88 Managers from 
31 locations worldwide have taken part during the last 12 
months.  Since  its  inception,  this  programme  has  helped 
nearly 600 SDL managers develop their capability as leaders, 
with plans to continue to expand its reach during 2016.  To 
reinforce concepts learned in MDP, we also provide leaders 
with targeted leadership videos, courses from Skillsoft and 
internally developed programmes on key topic areas, such 
as Giving Feedback;

SDL’s  Project  Management  Pathways  Programme: 
Based  on  the  Project  Management  Body  of  Knowledge 
(PMBOK® Guide) and fully ISO compliant, this programme 
was  further  extended  in  2015  to  include  a  combination 
of  classroom  and  Skillsoft  eLearning  programs,    delivered 
via  MyLX.    174  people  completed  Pathways  during  2015.  
In addition, SDL was very proud to be nominated for The 
Project  Management  Institute’s  Continuing  Professional 
Education  Product  of  the  Year  Award  for  our  Pathways 
Intermediate  Programme.    This  nomination,  recognised 
our ongoing commitment to the quality, applicability and 
relevance of project management training delivery; and

•  SDL Quality, Processes & Systems

was  recognised  by  the  Project  Management  Institute 
(PMI®),  the  world’s  largest  project  management  member 

Corporate Responsibility : People

association, as a provider of project management training 
known as a Registered Education Provider (R.E.P.) and is pre-
approved by PMI to issue Professional Development Units 
(PDUs) for all classroom training courses.

The  Group  continues  to  develop  progressive  relationships 
with several language facilities of universities in the countries 
in which it operates and supports translation as a profession. 
This serves as a way for the Group to develop the translation 
profession  as  well  as  providing  a  valuable  potential  career 
outlet for students and a source of potential future employees.

The  SDL  University  Partner  Programme  supports  universities 
and lecturers in the teaching of translation software worldwide 
and  offers  training,  free  certification  programmes  and  advice 
to  students  that  are  on-the-way  to  becoming  language/
translation  professionals. The  programme  saw  growth  during 
2015 adding 18 new universities as education partners bringing 
the total to over 350 worldwide in 68 countries. 

launch  of  SDL  Trados  Studio  2015  we  have 
With  the 
equipped  our  partner  universities  with  the  latest  software 
and certification material for their language labs and student 
computers and we have helped lecturers stay up-to-date with 
the latest developments in the  translation industry. Work has 
also  started  on  a  dedicated  Graduate  Programme,  which  is 
an  extension  of  the  University  Partner  Programme,  to  ensure 
that  language  graduates  also  have  access  to  certifications, 
software and training, once they leave University. Sharing our 
knowledge  about  Computer  Assisted  Translation  tools  and 
enabling graduates to develop the skills they need to start their 
professional  career  is  an  integral  part  of  our  commitment  to 
further develop the people, technology and best practices in 
the language industry.

The  Group  also  actively  collaborates  with  universities  and 
research  centres  to  promote  research,  solutions  and  assist 
with recruitment for the language and technology areas of the 
business.

• 

• 

• 

SDL  Research  continued 
its  collaboration  with  the 
University  of  Southern  California,  University  of  Colorado 
and the Linguistic Data Consortium to design and develop 
a  semantic  representation  of  language,  Abstract  Meaning 
Representation (AMR), aimed at advancing state-of-the-art 
language technologies and applications;

internships 

SDL  Research  offers  annual  summer 
for 
outstanding Ph.D. students in the field of Machine Learning 
and  Natural  Language  Processing.  Previous  interns  joined 
SDL  Research  from  competitive  programmes  at  top 
universities  such  as  Carnegie  Mellon  University,  University 
of Southern California, John Hopkins University, University 
of  Cambridge,  Heidelberg  University  and  University  of 
Sheffield;

SDL  began  a  public-private  partnership  project  with 
Centrum  Wiskunde  &  Informatica  (CWI),  as  part  of  the 
overall EU project called ‘Envisage’, to improve cloud based 
software for marketing purposes. In this joint project both 
CWI and SDL contribute to the research budget. The goal 
of the current research project is to develop an automatic 
monitoring  system  for  cloud  applications  to  support  the 
decision process for allocating server space from the cloud 

21

Strategic ReportStrategic ReportCorporate Responsibility : People

Gender Breakdown
Senior Management

41%

All Employees

50%

59%

50%

We  believe  in  treating  all  employees  equally  and  offer  equal 
opportunities in all aspects of employment and advancement 
regardless of race, nationality, gender, age, marital status, sexual 
orientation, disability, religion or political beliefs.

Corporate citizenship 

SDL  is  committed  to  being  a  good  corporate  citizen  in  the 
communities  in  which  it  operates,  conducting  business  in  a 
socially and ethically responsible manner. SDL recognises the 
value it gets from its continuing programme of Corporate Social 
Responsibility (CSR), both from the employee’s perspective of 
being an employer for whom staff can feel proud to work, and 
from the perspective of clients who increasingly prefer to work 
with companies who demonstrate core ethical values. 

Our corporate citizenship framework continues to target three 
primary areas:

•  We  support  communities  through  the  SDL  Foundation, 

which aims to promote sustainable development;

•  We  promote  and  facilitate  employee 

involvement 

in 

charitable endeavours; and

•  We are committed to reducing our environmental impact.

In 2015, many SDL offices participated in charitable endeavours 
to  help  people  or  organisations  in  their  local  communities.  
You  can  see  activities  on  the  CSR  page  of  our  website  – 
www.sdl.com. 

to applications; 

• 

• 

SDL’s  relationship  with  the  University  of  Bristol  and  the 
University  of  the  West  of  England  is  entirely  focussed  on 
internship programmes, where the research areas and goals 
of the internship are determined on a per-case basis; and

SDL  maintains  an  ongoing  relationship  with  the  Babes-
Bolyai  University  and  Technical  University  of  Cluj  to  help 
support  internship  and  graduate  support  programmes, 
covering both the technical and linguistic domain.

Equality and diversity

A diverse workforce helps us achieve our goals by helping us 
better understand and meet the needs of our customers.  We 
are both a multinational and a multicultural company.

Gender diversity is a key goal for us.  Over the SDL Group we 
employ  equal  numbers  of  men  and  women. The  proportion 
of  women  in  senior  management  is  slightly  below  this  ratio 
(female senior managers: 41%, male senior managers: 59%). 

SDL values applications from disabled or handicapped persons 
and our policy is to always consider employment applications 
from disabled or handicapped persons where that person can 
perform the job requirements.

Where existing employees become disabled, it is  the Group’s 
policy, wherever practicable to provide continuing employment 
under  normal  terms  and  conditions  and  disabled  people  are 
afforded the same training and development opportunities for 
personal growth as other employees within the organisation. 
Under  no  circumstance  will  discrimination  due  to  disability 
either direct or implied be tolerated.

22

Annual Report 2015Corporate Responsibility : People

pupils  to  graduate  from  University  and  use  their  educational 
skills to give back to the community and contribute to Kenya’s 
growing  economy.  As  a  result  of  this  work  100%  of  Hatua’s 
high  school  graduates  qualified  for  University  with  academic 
results significantly above the local and national averages. The 
dedication of the young people was demonstrated by the fact 
that 36% of students ranked in the top 10% of their class.

Food for the Hungry – the SDL Foundation has been working 
alongside Food for the Hungry, in Kenya, on a 10 year project 
to  turnaround  the  impoverished  community  of  Maisa  Bora. 
Great  strides  have  been  made  over  the  last  2  years  with  the 
village  elders  and  community  leaders  who  have  been  taking 
responsibility for developing income generating projects and 
driving attendance at the local schools and improving results. 
The  Foundation’s  funds  have  been  specifically  used  by  the 
community to successfully establish small businesses.

Santa  Maria  Education  Fund  –  this  small  fund  based  in 
Paraguay  and  founded  by  the  mother  of  a  Maidenhead 
employee, has relied on volunteers to carry out life changing 
educational  and  vocational  scholarship  support  to  the 
teenagers  of  impoverished  families.  The  SDL  Foundation 
funding will enable SMEF to employ its first full time resource 
for up to 3 years to concentrate on arranging more teaching 
volunteers  and  establishing  industry  relationships  to  create 
more  employment  opportunities  enabling  the  students  to 
significantly improve their lives and those of their wider families.

SDL Foundation

2015  was  another  excellent  year  for  the  SDL  Foundation.  It 
continued  to  partner  with  charities  to  support  projects  in 
disadvantaged  communities  across  the  world,  helping  them 
to become self-sufficient. These aspects are at the heart of the 
SDL Foundation as it seeks causes and charities that mirror its 
objectives  of  supporting  structural  and  sustainable  projects.  
The  Foundation  enables  recipients  to  better  their  own  and 
their  family’s  future  through  income  generating  activities  or 
educational and vocational training assisting them to achieve 
full-time employment and improve their quality of life.

It  also  continued  to  put  a  strong  emphasis  on  employee 
engagement  and  collaborated  with  SDL’s  (CSR)  programme 
to  enhance  awareness  of  the  SDL  Foundation  and  increase 
employee involvement from SDL’s global offices in CSR activities. 
This  was  demonstrated  in  May  2015  as  the  SDL  Foundation 
celebrated its 5 year anniversary. SDL offices across the globe 
participated,  held  fundraising  activities  and  developed  new 
ways  to  get  involved  with  both  the  SDL  Foundation  and 
charities and initiatives local to the offices.

Projects in 2015 include:

Hatua  Likoni  –  the  SDL  Foundation’s  funding  helped  Hatua 
Likoni to sponsor over 250 children in 2015, 150 in high school 
and 100 in university.  The students come from disadvantaged 
families  in  an  extremely  deprived  area  of  Mombasa,  Kenya.  
Hatua Likoni also provides them with out-of-school mentoring, 
such  as  decision  making, 
life  skills  building  and  career 
development, and internship opportunities, which enables the 

23

Strategic ReportStrategic ReportCorporate Responsibility : People

Employee Engagement

Wherever  possible  the  SDL  Foundation  seeks  to  support 
projects  where  SDL  employees  are  able  to  participate  in  the 
projects as well as organise fundraising events to complement 
the  funds  provided  by  the  SDL  Foundation.  The  following 
examples  highlight  key  employee-led  endeavours  supported 
by the SDL Foundation:

• 

• 

• 

 The  SDL  Foundation  renewed  its  partnership  with  the 
Prince’s Trust by providing funding for a further 4 years. SDL 
employees in the UK have embraced this charity by using 
their skill sets and life experience to help underprivileged 
teenagers  to  move  into  vocational  positions  and  the 
employment  market.  In  2015,  28  volunteers  carried  out 
11 CV and Interview Skills workshops and their great work 
earned SDL a runner up award in the Volunteering category 
for the Prince’s Trust 2015 Corporate Awards; 

 The  SDL  Foundation’s  collaboration  with  BeadforLife, 
initiated  by  the    office  in  Colorado,  has  been  extended 
into funding for the Beads to Business training programme 
which helps women to set up small local businesses over 
and  above  bead  manufacturing.  It  gives  them  the  tools 
they need to survive and thrive in their own local economy, 
which  will  help  them  provide  for  their  families  and  send 
their children to school.  In December 2015, 9 SDL offices 
took  part  in  a  Global  Bead  Sale,  selling  handmade  beads 
made out of colourful recycled paper, to support women 
in Uganda. The money raised helps to provide training and 
coaching  to  help  the  women  expand  their  business  and 
oxen and ploughs to increase farming income; and

The SDL Foundation continued to work with the St Wilfrid’s 
Centre  in  Sheffield,  enabling  the  homeless  to  re-establish 
themselves and re-join the labour market. The Centre has 
benefitted hugely over the past 3 years from the close and 
enthusiastic  involvement  of  the  local  SDL  office,  through 
employees  using  their  skill  sets  to  help  members  at  the 
Centre  and  through  a  number  of  innovative  fundraising 
exercises.

24

Annual Report 2015Corporate Responsibility

Environment
Measuring and reporting energy efficiency, carbon and greenhouse gases (GHG)

SDL is a software and professional services company and, whilst 
our carbon emissions are low compared to some other sectors, 
they’re still our biggest environmental impact.  Therefore, we 
work to improve our environmental impacts across the Group 
which result primarily from travel and energy use in buildings. 

In  2015,  SDL  complied  with  the  Energy  Savings  and 
Opportunities Scheme (ESOS).  This scheme, mandated in the 
UK under an EU Directive, required businesses to measure their 
total  energy  consumption  and  identify  cost-effective  savings 
opportunities  for  their  UK  operations  to  improve  energy 
efficiency and profitability.  SDL worked with Carbon Clear to 
conduct  energy  efficiency  audits  and  act  as  its  external  Lead 
Assessor to comply with the requirements of the scheme.

The  footprint  covers  the  period  of  the  12  months  ending 
31  December  2015  and  is  presented  alongside  the  data  for 
the  previous  year  (2014)  for  comparison.  The  footprint  was 
calculated by Carbon Clear Limited using data provided by SDL 
and was conducted in line with the ISO-14064-1:2006 standard 
for organisational carbon footprinting. 

included 

Under  an  operational  control  approach,  all  SDL’s  operations 
in  the  footprint.  Activity  data  was 
have  been 
collected  from  SDL’s  UK  Head  office  in  Maidenhead  and  five 
other major office sites and emissions  then uplifted for all of 
SDL’s remaining offices based on revenue, giving an emissions 

total for SDL’s entire global operations. This has been done in 
order to comply with Mandatory Green House Gas Emissions 
reporting regulations.

2015 Headline Results 

The  analysis  shows  that  SDL’s  carbon  emissions  for  the  six 
offices during this period amounted to 4,357 tonnes of CO2e 
(Figure 1).  

The largest source of emissions was commuting (27%), followed 
by  business  travel  (26%)  and  electricity  consumption  (25%). 
The  Maidenhead  office  accounted  for  36%  of  the  six  offices’ 
total emissions. The  uplifted  total for the  global operations is 
8,811 tonnes of CO2e.

Year on Year Analysis 

When  compared  with  2014  (Figure  2),  the  total  footprint  has 
decreased  by  14.8%  (755  tonnes  CO2e).  The  movement  in 
emissions year on year is summarised below:

• 

Emissions from business travel have decreased significantly 
by  18.2%  (251  tonnes  CO2e).  This  can  be  attributed  to  a 
21.9%  (290  tonnes  CO2e)  reduction  in  air  travel  (which  is 
carbon intensive), attributable to sites such as Superior USA 
which reduced its air mileage by 47%. This site had a high 

Figure 1: Carbon emissions summary by activity for 2015 for six sampled sites

1200

1000

800

600

400

200

0

Commuting

Business
Travel

Electricity

Additional
Upstream
Services

Other

Gas
and Fuels

25

Strategic ReportStrategic ReportCorporate Responsibility : Environment

level of air travel during 2014 due to travel requirements to 
our off-shore office in Mumbai, India. 

Global Footprint 

• 

• 

• 

Emissions  related  to  direct  electricity  consumption  have 
also decreased by 126.1 tonnes CO2e, or 10.2%. In addition 
to this the gas consumption has continued to drop with a 
0.7% (0.6 tonnes CO2e) drop this year. 
There has been a significant decrease in the emissions from 
staff commuting (20.2% reduction, 293 tonnes CO2e). It is 
noted  that  a  larger  number  of  responses  were  received 
for  2015. This  increase  in  sample  size  would  increase  the 
accuracy of commuting calculations. 

There has been a significant increase in the area of business 
travel  by  car,  with  a  133.6%  (37.1  tonnes  CO2e)  increase 
in  emissions.  This  increase  can  be  partly  attributed  to  a 
reduction in other business travel options. 

The results show that GHG emissions in the period were 8,811.4 
tonnes of CO2e, comprised of the following;  

Scope 1 & 2 – Combustion of fuels & operation of facilities. 
•  Direct  Emissions  (Scope  1)  were  193.2  tonnes  of  CO2e  or 

• 

2% of the total. 
Indirect Emissions (Scope 2) were 2,238.9 tonnes of CO2e 
or 25% of the total.  

Scope 3 – Additional Activity Data Reported 

•  Other, Indirect Emissions (Scope 3) were 6,379.3 tonnes of 

CO2e or 72% of the total. 

The table on page 27 gives a more detailed breakdown of the 
emissions by activity and a year on year analysis.

Figure 2: Carbon emissions year on year comparison (tonnes CO2e)

3000

2500

2000

1500

1000

500

0

Key

2015 tCO2e

2014 tCO2e

Commuting

Business
Travel

Electricity

Additional
Upstream Activities

Other

Natural Gas
and Fuels

Refrigerants

Note: The 2014 footprint has been recalculated with actual and updated data from November and December 2014. Previously for 2014 analysis, only data from 
January to October 2014 was provided with extrapolation method used for the remaining two months (November and December). Methodologies have also been 
refined and aligned to ensure a like-for-like comparison between reporting periods.

26

Annual Report 2015Corporate Responsibility : Environment

Types of Emissions

Activity

2014 tonnes CO2e

2015 tonnes CO2e

Gas

Diesel

Direct (Scope 1)

Pool Cars / Company Cars

Refrigerant

Subtotal

Indirect Energy (Scope 2)

Purchased Electricity

Subtotal

Business Travel

Flights

Car (Staff owned)

Other

Commuting

Car

Other

159.0

18.0

177.0

2,371.6

2,371.6

2,650.4

2,553.1

53.3

44.0

2,788.8

2,590.5

198.4

Additional Upstream  Activities

1,385.5

Electricity T&D

WTT**

Other

Waste

Water

Deliveries

Stationery

Printed Materials

Postage

Hotel

Subtotal

Indirect Other (Scope 3)

Total Emissions

176.5

1,209.0

457.9

128.1

7.9

113.2

9.2

2.8

0.3

196.6

7,282.7

9,831.3

166.1

0.0

11.3

15.7

193.2

2,238.9

2,238.9

2,279.6

2,096.9

131.0

51.7

2,341.3

2,153.7

187.6

1,268.0

169.3

1,098.7

490.4

47.4

10.0

143.4

8.1

3.2

0.6

277.5

6,379.3

8,811.4

** Well-to-tank (WTT) emissions are those emissions associated with the upstream processes of extracting, refining, and transporting raw fuel to the vehicles, asset or 
process under scrutiny

Note: The 2014 footprint has been recalculated with actual and updated data from November and December 2014. Previously for 2014 analysis, only data from January 
to October 2014 was provided with extrapolation method used for the remaining two months (November and December). Methodologies have also been refined and 
aligned to ensure a like-for-like comparison between reporting periods.

Intensity metrics of SDL’s global operations based on Full Time Employees (FTE):

Year

2015

2014

Tonnes CO2e

Revenue (£m)

Tonnes CO2e/£m

8,811.4

9,831.3

267.0

260.3

33.0

37.8

FTE

3,345

3,425

Tonnes CO2e/FTE

2.6

3.0

This Strategic Report is approved by the Board of Directors and signed on its behalf by

Dominic Lavelle
Director
15 March 2016

27

Strategic ReportStrategic ReportGovernance

Board of Directors

28

David Clayton
Executive Chairman

Tenure: 6 years (appointed December 2009)

Board Committees: Nomination 

David Clayton was appointed Executive Chairman of SDL PLC on 1 October 
2015.  He previously served as non-executive Chairman of SDL PLC from 
July 2013. He joined SDL as a Non-Executive Director in December 2009 
and has served as the Senior Independent Director. 

After  a  career  in  senior  executive  roles  at  a  number  of  international 
technology companies he joined BZW where, after its merger with CSFB 
in  1997,  he  was  Managing  Director  and  Head  of  European Technology 
Research until 2004. David Clayton joined The Sage Group plc Board in 
June 2004 as a Non-Executive Director and took up his executive role as 
Director of Strategy and Corporate Development from October 2007 to 
February 2012.

Dominic Lavelle
Chief Financial Officer

Tenure: 2 years (appointed November 2013)

Board Committees: None

Dominic Lavelle is a qualified Chartered Accountant who joined SDL in 
November 2013. Previously, Dominic has held CFO roles within a number 
of private and publicly traded companies including Mothercare plc, Alfred 
McAlpine plc, Allders plc and Oasis plc where his roles have encompassed 
commercial, operational and strategic responsibilities. 

Chris Batterham
Non-executive director

Tenure: 16 years (appointed October 1999)

Board Committees: None

Chris Batterham is a Chartered Accountant with significant experience in 
the business services sector. He was finance director of Unipalm plc, the 
first internet company to float on the London Stock Exchange, and, latterly, 
Chief  Financial  Officer  of  Searchspace  Group  until  2005.  He  currently 
holds a number of non-executive directorships including NCC Group plc, 
Toumaz Holdings Ltd, Iomart plc and is Chairman of Eckoh plc.

Annual Report 2015Glenn Collinson 
Non-Executive Director | independent

Tenure: 1 year (appointed June 2014)

Board Committees: Audit, Nomination and Chairman of Remuneration

In 1998 Glenn Collinson co-founded Cambridge Silicon Radio (CSR plc) as a 
start-up project and was a member of the board of directors that managed 
the growth of CSR through its listing as a public company in 2004 and up 
until 2007, serving first as Marketing Director and then as Sales Director. Prior 
to CSR plc, he held positions including Senior Engineer and then Marketing 
Manager  at  Cambridge  Consultants  Ltd  and  held  positions  as  a  Design 
Engineer and Marketing Manager at Texas Instruments. He is a member of 
the Institution of Engineering and Technology and holds a B.Sc. in Physics and 
a M.Sc. in Electronics from Durham University, as well as a MBA from Cranfield 
University. Mr Collinson currently holds other non-executive director positions 
within the technology sector.

Mandy Gradden
Non-Executive Director | independent

Tenure: 4 years (appointed January 2012)

Board Committees: Remuneration and Chairman of Audit

Mandy  Gradden  is  an  experienced  corporate  CFO  with  more  than  20 
years  financial  and  senior  management  experience.    She  is  CFO  of  the 
media group Ascential plc which recently floated on the London Stock 
Exchange.    Previous  roles  include:  CFO  of  the  private-equity  owned 
Torex,  the  retail  technology  firm;  CFO  at  the  FTSE  250  business  and 
technology  consultancy,  Detica;  Director  of  Corporate  Development  at 
Telewest Communications; and Group Financial Controller at Dalgety. She 
began her career at Price Waterhouse, where, in 1992, she qualified as a 
Chartered Accountant.  

Alan McWalter
Non-Executive Director | Senior independent director

Tenure: 2 years (appointed March 2014)

Board Committees: Audit, Remuneration and Chairman of Nomination

Alan  McWalter  is  currently  Chairman  of  Churchill  China  plc,  and  the 
Senior  Independent  Director  at  Dignity  Plc.    He  is  also  Chairman  of 
Belfield Furnishings Ltd.  He has previously held Chairmanship and non 
executive roles with numerous quoted and private companies.  He was an 
Executive Director of Marks & Spencer and Kingfisher Group companies 
and in his earlier career held both marketing and general management 
appointments  with  Thomson  Consumer  Electronics  and  Spillers  Foods 
having started his career with Unilever.

None of the directors have been accused of, or been reported as, acting in breach of professional conduct by any regulatory or statutory authority.

There have been a number of changes to the Board since last year which are described in the Executive Chairman’s Review (see page 4) 
and the Corporate Governance report on pages 30 to 34.

29

GovernanceGovernanceGovernanceCorporate Governance Report

Dear Shareholder, 

One of my key responsibilities is to lead the Board and ensure that it exercises objective and informed 
judgement to create sustainable, long-term shareholder value.   This requires having the best team 
in place to execute and closely monitor business performance and maintain a framework of prudent 
and effective controls to mitigate risk. The Nomination Committee has clear plans for CEO and Non-
Executive succession which are set out below in the report from the Nomination Committee.

The SDL Group is undergoing a significant operational transformation as the Non-Core businesses 
are divested. Your Board will continue to ensure the Group has the leadership and insights necessary 
to achieve its ambitions.

The Board is committed to ensuring that high standards of governance, values and behaviours are 
consistently  applied  throughout  the  Group. These  elements  are  critical  to  business  integrity  and 
maintaining investors’ trust in SDL.

David Clayton
Executive Chairman

30

Annual Report 2015GovernanceCorporate governance statement 

The Board is responsible for overall Group strategy and for the 
delivery of that strategy within a strong corporate governance 
and  corporate  responsibility  framework.  That  framework 
is  described  in  the  following  pages.  The  Board  of  Directors 
is  committed  to  the  principles  of  corporate  governance 
contained  in  the  UK  Corporate  Governance  Code  (‘Code’) 
issued by the Financial Reporting Council (‘FRC’) in September 
2014  and  which  is  publicly  available  at  www.frc.org.uk.  From 
January to September 2015, the Company complied with the 
provisions  of  the  Code.  In  October  2015,  David  Clayton  was 
appointed as Executive Chairman (an interim role combining 
the  roles  of  Chairman  and  CEO)  following  the  resignation 
of  Mark  Lancaster.  This  temporary  non-compliance  is  being 
addressed by the Board and a short list of candidates for the 
vacancy has been drawn up.

The Board has carried out a robust assessment of the principal 
risks  facing  the  Group.  Throughout  the  year  the  Board,  via 
the  Audit  and  Executive  Committees,  reviews  and  evaluates 
the  major  risks  faced  by  the  Group  and  the  controls  and 
mitigation  plans  in  place. The  system  of  internal  control  and 
risk  management  is  reviewed  annually.  Throughout  the  year 
ending 31 December 2015 and to date, the Group has operated 
a system of internal control that provides reasonable assurance 
of effective operations covering all controls, including financial 
and  operational  controls  and  compliance  with  laws  and 
regulations.  Processes  are  in  place  for  identifying,  evaluating 
and managing the principal risks facing the Group.

Leadership 

The Board of Directors is responsible for overall Group strategy, 
for  approving  major  agreements,  transactions  and  other 
financing  matters  and  for  monitoring  the  progress  of  the 
Group against budget. All Directors receive sufficient relevant 

Leadership framework

information on financial, business and corporate issues prior to 
meetings  and  there  is  a  formal  schedule  of  matters  reserved 
for  decision  by  the  Board,  which  includes  material  asset 
acquisitions and disposals, granting and varying authority levels 
of  the  Chairman  and  the  executive  directors,  determination 
and  approval  of  the  Group’s  objectives,  strategy  and  annual 
budget,  investment  decisions,  corporate  governance  policies 
and  financial  and  dividend  policies.  From  January  to  the  end 
of  September  2015  the  Board  of  Directors  consisted  of  the 
Chairman,  two  Executive  Directors  and  four  Non-Executive 
Directors.  From  October  2015  to  date  one  of  the  Executive 
Directors resigned and the Chairman took up the interim role 
of Executive Chairman.  All the Directors bring to the Company 
a broad and valuable range of experience and further details 
of  this  together  with  additional  biographical  details  are  set 
out above. There is a strong non-executive representation on 
the  Board,  including  the  Senior  Independent  Director,  Alan 
McWalter. This provides effective balance and challenge.  

Board committees 

• 

• 

The  Audit  Committee,  which  during  the  major  part  of 
the  year  consisted  of  Mandy  Gradden  (who  chairs  the 
Committee),  Glenn  Collinson  and  Alan  McWalter  all  of 
whom  are  independent  Non-Executive  Directors.  David 
Clayton resigned from the Committee on 23 October 2015 
on  his  appointment  as  Executive  Chairman.  The  Board  is 
satisfied  that  all  members  of  the  Committee  have  recent 
and relevant financial experience. The Committee meets at 
least three times a year. Further information on the work of 
the Audit Committee is given below. 

The Nomination Committee consists of Alan McWalter (who 
chairs the Committee), David Clayton and Glenn Collinson, 
ensuring that a majority of the Committee’s members are 
independent Non-Executive Directors. Further information 
on the work of the Nomination Committee is given below. 

Board

Executive
Management 
Team

Operating 
businesses

Board
Committees

Audit
Nomination
Remuneration

31

GovernanceGovernanceGovernance• 

The Remuneration Committee consists of Glenn Collinson 
(who  chairs  the  Committee),  Mandy  Gradden  and  Alan 
McWalter,  all  of  whom  are  independent  Non-Executive 
Directors.  Further 
information  on  the  work  of  the 
Remuneration Committee is given below.

All  Board  committees  operate  within  defined  terms  of 
reference and sufficient resources are made available to them 
to undertake their duties. The terms of reference of the Board 
committees  are  available  on  the  website  (www.sdl.com)  and 
by  request  from  the  Company  Secretary.  The  attendance  of 
individual Directors at the regular meetings of the Board and 

its Committees in the year is set out below, with the number 
of  meetings  each  was  eligible  to  attend  shown  in  brackets. 
Directors who are unable to attend meetings will receive the 
papers  and  any  comments  will  be  reported  to  the  relevant 
meeting. Directors have attended a number of ad hoc meetings 
during the year in addition to the regular Board meetings and 
have contributed to discussions outside of the regular meeting 
calendar.  Directors  also  attended  several  strategy  meetings 
to  enable  further,  more  detailed,  discussion  of  the  Group’s 
position and future development.

Director

Board

David Clayton, Executive Chairman  
from 1 October 2015

Chris Batterham, NED

Glenn Collinson, NED

Mandy Gradden, NED

Mark Lancaster, CEO  to 1 October 2015

Dominic Lavelle, CFO

Alan McWalter, SID

9(9)

7(9)

9(9)

8(9)

6(6)

9(9)

9(9)

* David Clayton also attended the October meeting by invitation.

Audit
Committee

2(2)*

–

3(3)

3(3)

–

–

3(3)

Nomination
Committee

Remuneration
Committee

3(3)

–

3(3)

–

–

–

3(3)

–

–

7(7)

7(7)

–

–

7(7)

Corporate governance highlights 

Board focus during the year 

During the year, the Board spent its time considering a wide range of matters. 

These included: 

• 

in-depth operational analysis of key businesses; 

•  operational reports from business areas;

•  budgets and long term plans for the Group; 

•  financial statements and announcements;

• 

• 

• 

treasury and funding matters

corporate and social responsibility; 

legal and governance matters

•  board committee feedback

• 

• 

shareholder feedback and reports from brokers and analysts; and

risk management and controls. 

In  addition  to  its  regular  programme  of  activities  the  Board  made  a  number  of  strategic  decisions  in  the  year,  which 
included: 

• 

• 

• 

• 

refocused Group strategy towards language-centric activities; 

identified non-core businesses for divestment;

reviewed and updated the Group’s remuneration structures to provide greater transparency to shareholders and 
ensuring the business can attract the best skills in the market; and

succession planning for senior management. 

 The Directors are responsible for preparing the Annual Report and Financial Statements and consider that, taken as a 
whole,  the  Annual  Report  and  Financial  Statements  are  fair,  balanced  and  understandable  and  provide  the  necessary 
information for shareholders to assess the Company’s performance, business model and strategy. 

32

Annual Report 2015Governance 
Effectiveness and Evaluation

All  of  the  Non-Executive  Directors  are  appointed  for  fixed 
terms. They are kept fully informed of all relevant operational 
and  strategic  issues  and  bring  a  strongly  independent  and 
experienced judgement to bear on these issues. Since October 
2015  and  the  appointment  of  David  Clayton  as  Executive 
Chairman,  the  Non-Executive  Directors  meet  with  him,  from 
time  to  time,  without  the  presence  of  the  other  Executive 
Director.  Prior  to  October  2015  the  Non-Executive  Directors 
met with David Clayton in his role as Chairman. 

The Board considers that each of the Non-Executive Directors 
are independent of the Group and free from any business or 
other  relationship  which  could  materially  interfere  with  the 
exercise  of  their  independent  judgement.  It  was  noted  that 
Chris Batterham has served for more than sixteen years as Non-
Executive Director and under the Code is no longer considered 
to be independent. The Nomination Committee has considered 
the matter carefully and believes that Chris Batterham continues 
to demonstrate the qualities of independence in carrying out 
his  role,  supporting  the  Board  in  an  objective  manner.  His 
length  of  service  and  resulting  experience  and  knowledge 
of the Company is of great benefit. Chris Batterham does not 
serve on any Board Committees. The Nomination Committee 
will keep his independence under review.

The Board, individual directors and the Board’s main committees 
are reviewed annually, with this year’s review being externally 
facilitated  by  Lintstock  Limited.  No  issues  arose  that  were 
required  to  be  addressed  but  the  Board’s  discussion  of  the 
review’s output will help to shape the future development of 
the Group’s risk profile. 

of  the  Non-Executive  Directors,  identifying  any  development 
opportunities or training needs. 

Following any appointment to the Board, a tailored induction 
is developed which includes a strategic and financial overview 
as well as high level introductions to all divisions and functions 
of the Group.

On-going  development  opportunities  for  all  Directors  will 
be  provided,  as  required.  Any  training  will  take  account  of 
individual’s  skill  sets  and  be  designed  to  meet  the  needs  of 
each  Director  as  well  as  the  collective  requirements  of  the 
Board and its Committees. 

Re-election

All of the Directors holding office as at 31 December 2015 were 
reappointed at the Annual General Meeting on 27 April 2015 
and all of them have submitted themselves for re-election at 
the forthcoming Annual General Meeting.  

Professional Advice

All  Directors  have  access  to  the  advice  and  services  of  the 
Company  Secretary,  who  is  responsible  to  the  Board  for 
ensuring  that  board  procedures  are  complied  with.  Both  the 
appointment  and  removal  of  the  Company  Secretary  are 
matters for the Board as a whole. 

All Directors are able to take independent professional advice 
in  the  furtherance  of  their  duties  whenever  it  is  considered 
appropriate  to  do  so  and  have  access  to  such  continuing 
professional  development  opportunities  as  are  identified  as 
appropriate in the Board appraisal process. 

The Non-Executive Directors meet to review the performance 
of the Chairman (or Executive Chairman). The performance of 
the other Executive Director is appraised by the Chairman (or 
Executive Chairman). The Chairman appraises the performance 

Composition & Succession

The composition of the Board and its Committees is kept under 
review,  with  the  aim  of  ensuring  that  there  is  an  appropriate 
balance of power and authority between Executive and Non-

Diversity 
Balance of Non-Executive Directors : Executive Directors

Executive Chairman

Executive Director

Male : Female

Non-Executive Directors

Length of tenure

0-4 years

6 years

16 years

33

GovernanceGovernanceGovernanceExecutive Directors and that the Directors collectively possess 
the skills and experience necessary to direct the Company and 
the Group’s business activities. 

The Board is well-placed by the mixture of skills, experience and 
knowledge  of  its  Directors  to  act  in  the  best  interests  of  the 
Company and its shareholders.

Relations with shareholders 

The  Board  encourages  communication  with  the  Company’s 
institutional and private investors. 

The  Annual  General  Meeting  provides  an  opportunity  for 
Directors  to  report  to  investors  on  the  Group’s  activities,  to 
answer their questions and receive their views. 

investors, 

The  Chairman,  Senior 
Independent  Director,  Committee 
Chairs  and  CFO  have  a  programme  of  meetings  with 
institutional 
individual  shareholder  groups  and 
financial analysts during the course of the year to discuss the 
business  performance and strategy.   Investors’  comments  are 
communicated to all members of the Board, enabling them to 
develop an understanding of the major shareholders’ views of 
the Group and these are considered in determining or varying 
the Group’s approach to a particular matter. 

From time to time, other presentations are made to institutional 
investors  and  analysts  to  enable  them  to  gain  a  greater 
understanding  of  important  aspects  of  the  Group’s  business. 
The Chairman, Senior Independent Director and the Chairman 
of the Remuneration Committee hold meetings with leading 
shareholders  to  discuss  remuneration  policies  and  other 
corporate governance matters and the comments received are 
reported  to  the  Board  and  considered  by  the  Remuneration 
Committee in determining or varying the Group’s approach to 
executive compensation. 

The  independence  of  the  Directors  and  whether  there  are 
any  potential  conflicts  of  interest  are  assessed  and  kept 
under review. It was concluded by the Board that all the Non-
Executive  Directors  were  independent,  notwithstanding  the 
case of Chris Batterham (who did not participate in the relevant 
discussions) that he had served on the Board for more than nine 
years. The Board considered the matter carefully and decided 
that  Chris  Batterham  continues  to  demonstrate  the  qualities 
of  independence  and  judgement  in  carrying  out  his  role, 
supporting the Executive Directors and senior management in 
an objective manner.

More than 50% of the Board is made up of independent Non-
Executive Directors.

the  Nomination  Committee.  Ultimately, 

There  is  an  established  process  for  external  appointments 
the 
through 
appointment  of  any  new  Director  is  a  matter  for  the  Board 
as a whole. Executive Director appointments are based upon 
merit  and  business  need.  Non-Executive  appointments  are 
based upon the candidates’ profiles matching those agreed by 
the  Nomination  Committee.  In  all  cases,  the  Board  approves 
the  appointment  only  after  careful  consideration.  Succession 
planning  for  the  Board  has  been  reviewed  and  developed 
during the year and further detail is provided in the Nomination 
Committee report. 

The  Human  Resources  department  has  a  wider  succession 
development  plan  for  senior  management  roles  across  the 
Group,  to  prioritise  those  roles  which  are  likely  to  require 
recruitment  within  the  next  five  years.  This  data  has  been 
considered  against  internally  identified  individuals,  with  high 
potential and the capability to fulfil those roles as they become 
vacant, to ensure that succession requirements can be met. 

Internal  individuals  will  be  developed  for  future  senior  roles 
and  this  will  be  complemented  with  external  recruitment  at 
a  senior  level  where  necessary,  to  balance  the  required  skills 
and  experience  of  the  senior  management  team  and  ensure 
continuing success in the future. 

The letters of appointment of the Non-Executive Directors will 
be available for inspection at the Annual General Meeting.

Diversity

Board candidates are considered on merit and against objective 
criteria and with due regard for the benefits of diversity on the 
Board, including gender.

No fixed quota is applied to decisions regarding recruitment, 
rather 
the  Nomination  Committee  considers  capability 
and  capacity  to  commit  the  necessary  time  to  the  role  in 
its  recommendations  to  the  Board.  The  intention  is  the 
appointment  of  the  most  suitably-qualified  candidate  to 
complement  and  balance  the  current  skills,  knowledge  and 
experience on the Board, seeking to appoint those who will be 
best able to help lead the Company in its long-term strategy. 

34

Annual Report 2015GovernanceAudit Committee

Membership in 2015
Mandy Gradden – Chairman

David Clayton – retired from the 
committee on 23 October 2015

Alan McWalter

Glenn Collinson

Membership in 2016

Mandy Gradden – Chairman
Alan McWalter 
Glenn Collinson

Dear Shareholder, 

The year ended 31 December 2015 has seen continuing change, both in the Group’s businesses 
and in the environment in which it operates. As a Committee, our responsibility is to ensure that 
information published by the Group properly presents its activities to stakeholders in a changing 
landscape, as well as overseeing the effective delivery of both external and internal audit services. 

During the year the Committee met three times and its principal activities were as follows: 

• 

The review of the annual and half-yearly financial statements to ensure these properly present 
the  Group’s  activities  in  accordance  with  accounting  standards,  law,  regulations  and  market 
practice.  This  includes  ensuring  that  the  Annual  Report,  taken  as  a  whole,  is  fair,  balanced 
and  understandable  and  provides  the  information  necessary  for  shareholders  to  assess  the 
Company’s performance, business model and strategy.

 ¶ A review with management and the external auditors of material areas in which significant 

judgements have been applied.

 ¶ Clarity of the disclosures in the Annual Report concerning one-off items including goodwill 

impairment.

•  A review of the impact of functional and presentational currencies used by the Group.

•  A review of the effectiveness of the Group’s financial controls and risk management.

•  Consideration of the Group’s readiness to address forthcoming accounting changes which will 
affect it, principally IFRS 15 and the requirement to provide a viability statement in the Annual 
Report.

Looking forward to 2016, the Committee will continue to:

•  work with the Board providing advice on the assessment, management and mitigation of the 

principal risks facing the Group;

•  develop new non-audit fee policies and procedures to ensure the Group remains compliant with 

the nature and proportion of non-audit work awarded to the Group’s auditors; and

•  ensure the Group is ready to adopt new accounting policies when required e.g. IFRS 15.

Mandy Gradden
Audit Committee Chairman

35

GovernanceGovernanceGovernance 
Committee role and responsibilities

The Committee is responsible for:

• 

assessing the integrity of the Group’s financial reporting and 
satisfying  itself  that  any  significant  financial  judgements 
made by management are sound;

•  evaluating the effectiveness of the Group’s internal controls, 

including internal financial controls;

• 

the  activities  and  performance  of 

scrutinising 
the 
internal  and  external  auditors,  including  monitoring  their 
independence and objectivity; and

•  overseeing  the  adequacy  of  the  Group’s  whistleblowing 

arrangements.

Membership 

All  the  members  of  the  Committee  are  independent  Non-
Executive Directors, listed below. To preserve the independence 
of  the  Committee,  David  Clayton  stepped  down  in  October 
2015 when he took up the interim role of Executive Chairman. 

Mandy  Gradden  has  chaired  the  Committee  since  July  2013. 
She is a Chartered Accountant and currently holds the position 
of Group Chief Financial Officer of the media group Ascential 
plc. The Board considers that Mandy Gradden has recent and 
relevant  financial  experience,  as  required  by  the  Code.  All  of 
the  Committee  members  have  significant  current  executive 
experience  in  various  industries.  This  range  and  depth  of 
financial  and  commercial  experience  enables  them  to  deal 

Committee Meeting Date Key Agenda Items

5 March 2015

Annual results

Significant accounting issues,  
key judgments & estimates

External auditor’s report

Review of preliminary results  
and draft announcement

Draft Annual report

effectively  with  the  matters  they  are  required  to  address  and 
to  challenge  management  when  necessary.  The  Company 
Secretary is secretary to the Committee.

The  Chief  Financial  Officer,  the  Executive  Chairman/Chief 
Executive  Officer,  the  KPMG 
lead  audit  partner,  other 
representatives  from  KPMG  and  other  senior  management 
attend meetings by invitation.

The  Committee  met  three  times  during  the  year  ended  31 
December 2015. Attendance was as follows:

Number of 
meetings eligible 
to attend

Number of 
meetings 
attended

Mandy Gradden 
- Chairman

David Clayton*

Glenn Collinson  

Alan McWalter 

3

3

3

3

3

3

3

3

*David Clayton resigned from the Committee on 23 October 2015.

Since  the  end  of  the  year,  the  Committee  has  met  once  (10 
March 2016) and all members attended. 

Outside of the formal meetings described here, the Chairman 
meets  regularly  with  KPMG,  the  Chief  Financial  Officer  and 
other SDL senior management.

Review of Effectiveness of External Audit

Review of the Internal audit organisation

Non-audit fees

Review of corporate structure

27 July 2015

Interim results

Key Judgments

Significant accounting issues,  
key judgments & estimates

External auditor’s interim report

Review of interim preliminary results  
and draft announcement

Review of internal audit site visit findings

Annual review of internal controls

Treasury/Foreign exchange review

23 October 2015

External auditor Audit Strategy report

IRFS 15- New Revenue Standard

Group Tax matters review  
with management

Internal audit report

10 March 2016

Annual results

Significant accounting issues,  
key judgments & estimates

Viability statement review

External auditor’s report

Review of preliminary results  
and draft announcement

36

Corporate structure update and  
distributable reserves review

Draft Annual report

Non Audit fees

Distributable reserves review

External audit assessment

Annual Report 2015GovernanceMeetings and Activities in 2015 

Only  the  members  of  the  Committee  have  the  right  to 
attend Committee meetings, however the Committee invites 
the  external  auditor,  KPMG  LLP  (“KPMG”)  to  every  meeting. 
Executive  directors,  senior  members  of  management  and 
advisors  are  invited  to  attend  meetings  as  appropriate.  The 
Committee considers that the presence of these attendees does 
not  influence  or  restrict  the  Committee’s  open  deliberation 
of  matters  or  the  Committees’  independence,  and  finds  that 
their presence has the advantage of enabling the Committee 
to  raise  questions  directly  of  them  and,  where  necessary,  to 
challenge them about matters under review. If the presence of 
any attendee is inappropriate or might compromise discussion, 
then  the  Committee  would  either  not  invite  the  attendee 
concerned or request that they not attend part of the meeting.

The Committee regularly meets with KPMG in the absence of 
executive management. 

The  Committee  undertakes  its  duties  in  accordance  with  its 
terms  of  reference  which  were  reviewed  during  the  year  to 
ensure that they remained fit for purpose and in line with best 
practice guidelines. The terms of reference are available on the 
Company’s website.

As part of the formal annual Board evaluation, the Committee’s 
effectiveness  was  subject  to  external  review  in  2015/2016. 
Details  of  the  process  can  be  found  on  page  33.  The 
Committee’s  composition  was  reviewed  and  it  has  been 
confirmed that there is sufficient expertise and resource to fulfil 
its responsibilities effectively. 

The  significant  judgments  considered  by  the  Committee  in 
relation to the 2015 accounts were:

Impairment  of  goodwill  and  intangibles:    This  is  an  area 
of  focus  for  the  Committee  given  the  materiality  of  the 
Group’s  goodwill  and  intangibles  balances  (£163.1  million 
at  31  December  2015  (£202.6  million  at  31  December  2014)) 
compared  to  the  market  capitalisation  of  the  Group  and  the 
inherent subjectivity in impairment testing. 

In  the  final  quarter  of  2015  the  Board  carried  out  a  strategic 
in  a 
review  of  the  Group’s  operations  which  resulted 
restructuring of the business. An impairment of £33.3 million 
has  been  recorded  against  goodwill.  Due  to  the  inherent 
uncertainty  involved  in  forecasting  and  discounting  future 
cash  flows,  this  was  one  of  the  key  judgemental  areas  for 
management and of focus for the external auditors.

The judgements in relation to goodwill impairment continue to 
relate primarily to the assumptions underlying the calculation 
of the value in use of the business, being: 

• 

• 

the achievability of the long-term business plan; 

the modelling assumptions underlying the valuation process 
including revenue growth rates and discount rates applied.

See notes 9 and 11 “Intangible assets” and “Impairment Testing 
of Goodwill” for further detail.

The Committee received detailed reporting from management 
and challenged the appropriateness of the assumptions made 
including: 

• 

• 

• 

the consistent application of management’s methodology; 

the achievability of the business plans; 

assumptions in relation to growth in the businesses; and 

•  discount rates. 

A  separate  in-depth  review  on  setting  discount  rates  for 
impairment  purposes  was  also  conducted  in  the  year.  This 
remains  an  area  of  audit  focus  and  KPMG  provided  detailed 
reporting  on  these  matters  to  the  Committee  including 
sensitivity analysis.

The  adequacy  of  the  Group’s  disclosures 
in  respect  of 
impairment  testing  was  assessed  and  evaluated  whether 
the  disclosures  properly  reflect  the  risks  inherent  in  the  key 
assumptions  and  the  requirements  of  relevant  accounting 
standards.

Technology  Revenue  Recognition:  There  is  a  key  area 
of  judgment  in  the  timing  of  this  recognition  and  resulting 
deferred revenue on licenced software and related services. This 
judgement could materially affect the timing and quantum of 
revenue and profit recognised in each period.

An  in-depth  review  of  revenue  accounting  was  undertaken 
by  management  and  presented  to  the  Committee  during 
the  year.  Management  outlined  the  Group’s  approach  to 
revenue recognition, particularly for more complex enterprise 
transactions.

The  Group  has  a  detailed  policy  on  revenue  recognition  for 
each  category  of  revenue:  Services,  Licence  and  Professional 
Services. This  includes  the  application  of  rules  relating  to  the 
allocation of fair values between these categories.  

is  comfortable  that  management  have 
The  Committee 
been  appropriately  balanced  where  contract  clauses  require 
judgment  and  concluded  that  the  timing  of  recognition 
continues to be in line with IFRS requirements.

Internal control and risk management

The  Board  considers  that  the  Group’s  systems  provide 
information  which  is  adequate  to  permit  the  identification 
of  key  risks  to  its  business  and  the  proper  assessment  and 
mitigation of those risks.

A  review  by  the  Audit  Committee  and  the  Board  of  the 
effectiveness  of  the  Group’s  risk  management  and  internal 
control systems is monitored on an ongoing basis. 

The Committee monitors, reviews and challenges the effective 
operation of risk management and control processes, including 
the  results  of  audits  and  reviews  undertaken  by  the  Internal 
Audit program (see below) on an ongoing basis as part of the 
system of risk management and internal control.

The Audit Committee reviewed and challenged management’s 
annual review of internal controls in July 2015. As part of this 
review,  management  has  reported  to  the  Audit  Committee 
that  it  has  not  identified  any  weaknesses  in  controls  that 
would have a material effect on the Group’s business. The Audit 
Committee has reviewed and accepted the processes adopted 
by management in this respect and accepted its conclusions. 

37

GovernanceGovernanceGovernanceKey elements of the Group’s internal financial control framework 
and procedures include:

Internal audit program: The Group Finance Director heads up 
the internal audit function. Specific business units are selected 
for audit of compliance risks and vulnerabilities in consultation 
with the Audit Committee.  Reports received from this program 
summarised  the  audits  undertaken  during  the  period  under 
review, the key findings of those audits, any recommendations 
to address the findings and the progress made by the site on 
implementing the recommendations. The Committee agreed 
to  continue  to  resource  the  internal  audit  function  internally. 
At  the  beginning  of  the  year  the  Committee  considered  and 
approved the site visit program for 2015.

Tax  risk  reviews:  The  Committee  received  and  considered 
presentations from the management on the Group’s principal  
tax  risks  and  how  these  were  managed.  The  Committee 
approved the strategy and focused on potential risks associated 
with the failure to deliver the tax strategy. 

Foreign  exchange  review:  The  Committee  received  and 
considered  presentations  from  management  on  the  Group 
currency cash flows and net earnings exposures. The Committee 
approved the Group’s foreign exchange policies and procedures.

Operational reviews: regular meetings of the executive team 
with  the  executive  directors  to  review  operational  aspects  of 
the business;

• 

• 

• 

Financial  reporting:  a  Group-wide  system  of  financial 
reporting,  budgeting  and  cash  forecasting  and  control 
through  which  financial  accounts  are  prepared  and 
submitted to the Board monthly;

Financial  data  verification:  regular  preparation  and,  when 
appropriate,  update  of  profit  and  cash  flow  forecasts,  to 
monitor actual against expected performance;

System  reviews  and  transformation  projects:  regular 
meetings  of  the  Board  and  Audit  Committee  at  which 
financial  information  is  reviewed  and  business  risks  are 
reported upon and monitored. 

Internal Audit

At  the  October  2015  Committee  meeting,  the  need  for  and 
potential scope of, an independent Internal Audit department 
was  reviewed.  The  Committee  decided  that  the  current 
procedures  and  escalations  on  risk,  control  and  governance 
from  the  risk  management  framework  together  with  the 
external auditor, are sufficient assurance and no independent 
internal  audit 
is  required  at  this  time.  These 
function 
arrangements will be kept under review.

External Auditors and independence

KPMG  have  been  auditors  to  the  Group  since  2010.  The 
Committee  is  satisfied  with  the  auditor’s  effectiveness  and 
independence and does not consider it necessary to undergo 
a tender process at this time. 

The  Committee  reviews  the  performance  of  the  external 
auditor  taking  into  account  their  performance  of  the  agreed 
audit plan and any amendments, input from management and 
responses to questions from the Committee and audit findings 
reported to the Committee.

38

The Committee:

•  met with key members of the KPMG audit team to discuss 

the 2015 audit plan and agree areas of focus.

• 

reviewed KPMG reports on the scope of the 2015 audit and 
any material issues identified.

•  was  also  briefed  by  KPMG  on  material  accounting  items, 

where significant judgement is needed.

The Committee has concluded that the external audit process 
operated  effectively  throughout  2015  and  KPMG  continue  to 
prove effective in their role as external auditor.

During the year, the Committee reviewed the processes that the 
external auditor has in place to safeguard their independence, 
and received a letter from the external auditor confirming that, 
in  their  opinion,  they  remained  independent.  The  external 
auditor  is  permitted  to  undertake  non-audit  services.  The 
Committee approves all non-audit work greater than £20,000. 
Such proposals must be justified and, if appropriate, be subject 
to  tender.  Any  ongoing  non-audit  services  provided  by  the 
auditors and the fees incurred are reviewed regularly. 

Non-audit services provided by the auditor can, because of their 
size  or  nature,  give  rise  to  threats  to  the  auditor's  objectivity 
and independence. The auditors, however, may be engaged to 
provide a non-audit service where: 

• 

• 

• 

The  skills  and  experience  of  the  auditor  make  them  the 
most suitable supplier of the non-audit service; 

There are safeguards in place that eliminate or reduce to an 
acceptable level any threat to objectivity and independence 
in the conduct of the audit resulting from the provision of 
the particular service by the auditor; and 

The fees incurred, or to be incurred, for non-audit services 
in  aggregate  (and  for  any  substantial  individual  service) 
relative  to  the  audit  fee  would  not  be  perceived  by  a 
reasonable and informed third party as giving rise to loss of 
independence on the part of the auditor. 

In considering whether it was appropriate to engage the auditor 
to  provide  the  non-audit  service,  management  considered 
the extent of the threats, if any, to the auditor’s objectivity and 
independence in the conduct of the audit. In 2015, the Group 
has undertaken corporate rationalisation exercises in the United 
States,  the  Netherlands,  Belgium  and  France.  In  each  case, 
management  considered  which  advisors  were  best  placed  to 
provide the most efficient and effective services to the Group. In 
the United States and Belgium, the Group considered that KPMG 
were the most suitable supplier and that there was no significant 
threat to their independence for the provision of these services. 
Approval for this work to be awarded to KPMG was sought and 
received from the Committee. 

The  Committee  are  aware  of  the  EU  and  UK  non-audit  fee 
restrictions  coming  into  force  in  July  2016.  The  Committee 
are  awaiting  the  final  interpretation  of  these  regulations  and 
policies  and  procedures  will  be  updated  once  this  guidance 
has been issued.

During  the  year,  the 
fees  paid  to  the  auditor  were 
£393,000  (2014:  £354,000)  for  audit  services  and  £621,000  
(2014: £351,000) for non-audit services.

Annual Report 2015GovernanceNomination Committee

Membership in 2015
Alan McWalter – Chairman

David Clayton

Glenn Collinson

Membership in 2016

Dear Shareholder, 

On  behalf  of  the  Board,  I  am  pleased  to  present  the  Nomination  Committee  Report  for  the  year 
ended 31 December 2015.

2015 was a significant and busy year for the Committee. The main activities of the Committee during 
the year included:

•  Review of the size and composition of the Board including necessary knowledge and experience.

•  Considered succession planning for Directors and senior management.

• 

Identified candidates for CEO and a new Non-Executive Director.

•  Reviewed the time requirements of Non-Executive Directors.

•  Reviewed the results of the Board performance evaluation.

Additional  information  on  the  activities  of  the  Committee,  including  the  details  of  the  process 
leading to the appointment of the new CEO and the services provided by Norman Broadbent and 
Spencer Stuart, executive search agencies, are set out in this report.

There were three meetings held during the year and, after each Committee meeting, I reported to 
the Board on the key issues discussed during the meeting.  A number of informal discussions were 
also held between the Committee members.

The Committee's terms of reference are available on the Company's corporate website www.sdl.com.

Alan McWalter
Nomination Committee Chairman
15 March 2016

39

GovernanceGovernanceGovernance 
 
 
 
 
Role of the Nomination Committee 

Principal Activities in 2015 

The Committee focused on executive succession planning 
following Mark Lancaster’s resignation and discussed this 
topic with the Board and the Group HR Director and in 
private sessions of the Committee. The Committee set out 
the types of skills, attributes and experience required of a 
new CEO, which it captured in its briefing to executive search 
agency, Spencer Stuart, who identified potential candidates. 
Committee members then interviewed candidates for the role 
and after careful consultation with all Board members made 
a recommendation on the appointment to the Board. The 
process is now in its final stages.

Similarly, a search process was conducted for a Non-Executive 
Director using the executive search agency, Norman Broadbent, 
and this too is in its final stages.

There was a major operational review carried out in late 2015 
and  a  strategy,  refocused  on  core  business,  was  approved 
by  the  Board  in  January  2016.  As  part  of  this  review  a  new 
organisational structure was agreed based on three continuing 
business units (Language Services, Language Technology and 
Global  Content  Technologies)  and,  as  a  consequence,  there 
were a number of changes in senior management to support 
and lead this new structure. 

We  were  delighted  to  be  able  to  promote  two  new  senior 
leaders from within the Group with significant industry relevant 
experience  and  believe  they  will  be  pivotal  in  delivering  our 
strategy over the medium term. 

The  Committee 
is  responsible  for  considering  the  size, 
structure  and  composition  of  the  Board,  the  retirement  and 
appointment of additional Directors, and making appropriate 
recommendations so as to maintain an appropriate balance of 
skills and experience on the Board. 

The  Committee  reviews  the  succession  requirements  of 
the  Board  and  senior  management  (including  the  need 
for  diversity)  and  makes  recommendations  to  the  Board  as 
appropriate. The table below sets out Committee membership 
and meeting attendance.

Membership in 2015

The  Committee  consists  of  Alan  McWalter  (Chairman),  David 
Clayton and Glenn Collinson. 

Only  members  of  the  Committee  have  the  right  to  attend 
meetings,  however  senior  management  as  well  as  external 
advisors may attend all or part of any meeting by invitation as 
and when appropriate.

The Company Secretary is secretary to the Committee.

Membership in 2015

Alan McWalter (independent 
Non-Executive Director) – 
Chairman

David Clayton (Executive 
Chairman) Non-Executive 
Director up to 1 October 2015 
when he took on the role of 
Executive Chairman

Glenn Collinson (independent 
Non-Executive Director)

March 
2015

October 
2015

December 
2015

✓

✓ 

✓

✓

✓

✓

✓

✓

✓

Since the end of the year the Committee has met once (March 
2016) and all members attended.

40

Annual Report 2015GovernanceReview of non-executive director 
performance 

Future plans

In the year ahead the Committee will continue to assess what 
enhancements should be made to the Board’s and Committees’ 
composition  and  will  continue  to  monitor  developments 
to  ensure  the  Company  remains  at  the  forefront  of  good 
governance practices.

Over  the  course  of  2015,  the  Chairman  held  meetings  with 
the  Non-Executive  Directors  to  review  their  performance 
and  contribution  to  the  Board.  This  covered  attendance, 
preparation for and contribution at meetings, their knowledge 
and  understanding  of  the  business  and  any  training  and 
development  requirements.  Following  this  review,  it  was 
concluded  that  each  Non-Executive  Director  continued  to 
make an effective contribution to the Board. 

Diversity

The  Committee  and  the  Board  have  sought  to  ensure  that 
appointments  are  of  the  best  candidates  and  are  based  on 
merit, with due regard for the benefits of diversity on the Board 
(while also meeting the requirements of the Equality Act 2013). 
The  Company  does  not  currently  publish  specific  diversity 
targets  but  in  practice,  it  has  created  a  balanced  Board  and 
Executive Management Team and continues to work to ensure 
this  is  replicated  across  the  entire  business,  in  particular  in 
relation to gender diversity.

Further  information  regarding  diversity  can  be  found  in  the 
Corporate Governance Report.

41

GovernanceGovernanceGovernanceSDL PLC Year Ended 31 December 2015

Directors’ Remuneration Report

SDL PLC Year Ended 31 December 2015

This  report  covers  the  activities  of  the  Remuneration  Committee  for  the  year  ended  31  December  2015  and  sets  out 
the  remuneration  policy  and  remuneration  details  for  Executive  and  Non-Executive  Directors.  Below  is  the  Annual 
Statement from the Chair of the Remuneration Committee followed by the Remuneration Policy and the Annual Report 
on Remuneration. 

Our  Remuneration  Policy,  set  out  on  pages  44  to  52,  will  be  put  to  shareholders  for  approval  in  a  binding  vote  at  the 
AGM on 28 April 2016 at the same time as separate resolutions to approve a new Long Term Incentive Plan and a new 
Deferred Share Bonus Plan, under which we intend to make awards from 2016.  The Annual Report on Remuneration (set 
out on pages 53 to 58) describes how this policy is planned to be implemented for the year ahead, together with details 
of remuneration paid in the financial year. This report together with the Annual Statement will be subject to the usual 
advisory vote at the 2016 AGM.

Annual statement 

Dear Shareholders

I am pleased to present, on behalf of the Board, the Directors’ 
Remuneration Report for the year ended 31 December 2015, 
which summarises the Group’s performance and the resulting 
remuneration for the year.

2015  was  a  year  of  change  in  our  Executive  Board  as  Mark 
Lancaster,  founder  of  the  Company  in  1992,  stepped  down 
as  CEO  on  1  October  2015  and  ceased  employment  on  31 
October 2015. As we continue our global search for a new CEO 
to take the Company into the next phase of its development, 
David  Clayton  has  temporarily  assumed  the  role  of  Executive 
(from  Non-Executive  Chairman)  and  Dominic 
Chairman 
Lavelle’s  role  as  Chief  Financial  Officer  has  taken  on  greater 
ongoing prominence. 

In this interim period, the need for continuity is of paramount 
importance  and,  with  this  in  mind,  the  Board  is  pleased  that 
executive  responsibilities  are  currently  being  undertaken  by 
existing Directors. 

David Clayton is working in a full-time capacity to ensure this 
continuity  and  to  lead  the  Company  during  this  transition. 
To  reflect  his  strong  contribution,  his  salary  has  been  set  at 
£400,000  p.a.  with  an  annual  bonus  of  50%  on-target  and 
capped at 62.5% of base salary. Because a new, permanent CEO 
is expected to be recruited during the course of the year, he is 
not, however, eligible to an award under the Company’s Long 
Term Incentive Plan. 

Dominic  Lavelle’s  role  has  significantly  broadened  since  1 
October  2015  to  include  additional  responsibilities  such  as 

42

leading  the  restructuring  announced  on  20  January  2016. 
Dominic’s  overall  importance  to  the  Company  at  a  time  of 
significant change has increased and the Board is particularly 
pleased by the leadership he has shown since the change in 
the Executive Board.  Reflecting this, his salary was increased to 
£310,000 effective from 1 October 2015 (previously £280,000). 
His  next  salary  review  will  be  in  late  2016,  effective  from  
1  January  2017.  Dominic’s  maximum  annual  bonus  in  2016 
will remain unchanged at 150% of salary and his LTIP award for 
2016 will be increased to 125% (previously 100%).  

The  Committee  considers  it  essential  that  our  executive 
reward  policy  takes  account  of  the  Company's  complexity 
and  global  presence,  that  it  appropriately  rewards  our  senior 
management team and remains fit for purpose in the context 
of risk management and recruiting a new CEO. In this regard 
it is important that our policy and, in particular, the individual 
grant limit in our LTIP gives us sufficient flexibility to attract top 
global leaders. 

incorporated  the  views  of 

Having  received  and 
leading 
shareholders  and  shareholder  bodies  through  an  extensive 
shareholder consultation process, we will be seeking approval 
for a new remuneration policy at the 2016 AGM. The Committee 
is conscious of good practice and therefore the structure of pay 
will continue to be in line with UK norms and, going forward, 
the policy will include additional good practice features such 
as bonus deferral, a post-vesting holding period, recovery and 
withholding provisions and a share ownership guideline.

Annual Report 2015GovernanceRemuneration policy and implementation for 2016 

The key changes being proposed for Executive Directors are:

Annual bonus:

• 

The annual bonus opportunity shall remain unchanged at 
150% of salary. Any bonus above 100% of salary will need 
to be deferred in shares and subject to a two-year holding 
period.

•  Greater  flexibility  will  be  available  on  the  choice  of 
performance  metrics  each  year  subject  to  the  majority 
being  on  financial  objectives.  The  2016  metrics  will  be 
revenue,  profit  before  tax,  amortisation  and  one-offs,  
personal objectives.

•  Recovery and withholding provisions will apply to both the 

cash and deferred bonus elements.

Long-Term Incentive Plan:

• 

• 

• 

It  is  proposed  that  the  individual  limit  is  increased  from 
150%  to  250%  of  salary  for  the  CEO,  whilst  retaining  the 
existing cap of 150% of salary for other Executive Directors.  

The CFO will receive an award with a face value of 125% of 
salary in 2016.

The  Committee  will  very  carefully  review  the  LTIP 
performance targets that will be set for each LTIP award, in 
light of the increased LTIP award policy limits, to ensure that 
they are appropriately stretching. For example, as described 
below, the EPS  growth targets for the 2016 LTIP award have 
been  significantly  increased  in  comparison  with  recent 
years’ awards.

•  Greater flexibility on the choice of metrics will be introduced 
in  future  years  to  support  the  Company’s  medium  term 
strategy, with at least one third on relative TSR, although the 
2016 award will continue to use TSR and EPS metrics, with 
an equal weighting on each. 

• 

For  the  2016  award,  TSR  will  be  measured  against  the 
constituents  of  the  FTSE  Small  Cap  Index  (excluding 
Investment Trusts) over the period 2016-2018 inclusive, with 
no vesting below the median of the index and 100% vesting 
at the upper quartile (and above) of the index.  Under the 
EPS  component,  nothing  will  vest  if  2018  adjusted  EPS  is 
less  than  27p;  25%  will  vest  for  2018  adjusted  EPS  of  27p 
rising up to full vesting for 2018 adjusted EPS of 39p. A post-
vesting holding period of 2 years will be introduced.

•  Recovery and withholding provisions will be introduced.

Share ownership:

•  A  200%  of  salary  share  ownership  guideline  will  be 
introduced,  where  it  is  expected  that  Executive  Directors 
build  and  maintain  a  holding  of  shares  to  the  value  of  at 
least 200% of salary within 5 years of the date of adoption 
of the 2016 Remuneration Policy or on appointment where 
later.

No  change  is  proposed  to  Executives’  benefits  or  pension 
arrangements.

Cognisant  of  investors’  continued  focus  on  executive  pay 
restraint, the Committee has considered these proposals very 
carefully  and  is  well  aware  of  the  significant  increase  to  the 
LTIP  award  limit.    However,  the  Committee  considers  that  a 
higher long term opportunity is essential, particularly in light 

of  the  international  search  for  a  new  CEO.  When  considered 
in context of the addition of several best practice features we 
believe the revised policy is fair and reasonable.

Performance and Remuneration for 2015

As described in the Strategic report, 2015 was a year of good 
progress  for  our  Language  Services  business  with  its  strong 
increase  in  profitability  underpinning  a  24.9%  year-on-year 
increase  in  overall  Group  profit  before  tax,  amortisation 
and  one-offs.  However,  the  performance  of  the  technology 
business did not meet expectations and meant that the sales 
bookings growth target for the Group was missed. 

Because of this, the multiplier on the annual bonus plan based 
on sales bookings growth was zero, resulting in zero bonuses 
as calculated from the revenue, profitability and sales bookings 
growth  targets.  However,  in  the  case  of  Dominic  Lavelle,  his 
performance  during  2015  was  at  such  a  high  level  that  we 
decided  to  exercise  the  discretion  allowed  in  the  policy  in 
exceptional situations where the calculation of annual bonus 
does not reflect individual contribution. Having considered this 
matter  very  carefully,  we  awarded  Dominic  a  cash  bonus  for 
2015 of £100,000. This bonus was around 23% of his maximum 
opportunity or 65% of the cash bonus he received in 2014 and 
we felt that this was within the range indicated as acceptable 
during the consultation we had with leading shareholders. 

The LTIP award in 2013 was assessed against its performance 
conditions at the end of 2015. Because the TSR growth over the 
3 year performance period was below the reference index, the 
award lapsed in full for all recipients.

When Mark Lancaster resigned as CEO on 1 October 2015, the 
Company agreed with him the compensation on leaving that 
was announced on the Company’s website on 5 October 2015, 
and is repeated below on page 55. Reflecting his founder status 
and  long  service  with  the  Company,  the  Committee  treated 
Mark as a good leaver for his outstanding LTIP awards. His 2013 
award lapsed (as set out above) and, in line with good practice, 
his  other  awards  were  tested  for  performance  and  time  pro 
rating was applied. 

The  Committee  is  satisfied  that  the  incentive  outcomes 
detailed above are reflective of the Company’s performance.

Shareholders’ views

The  Committee  has  carried  out  an  extensive  shareholder 
consultation  exercise  on  the  proposed  arrangements  and  is 
pleased with the constructive feedback and the level of support 
received. The Committee continues to take an active interest in 
shareholders’ views and looks forward to maintaining an open 
and transparent dialogue in the future.

The  new  policy  will  be  put  to  a  binding  shareholder  vote, 
alongside separate resolutions to approve the new Long Term 
Incentive  Plan,  a  deferred  share  bonus  plan  and  the  usual 
resolution to approve the Remuneration Report. I hope you will 
be able to support our proposals at the 2016 AGM. 

Glenn Collinson
Remuneration Committee Chairman
15 March 2016

43

GovernanceGovernanceGovernanceRemuneration Policy Report

This  part  of  the  Directors'  Remuneration  Report  sets  out  the 
remuneration policy for the Company and has been prepared 
in accordance with the Companies Act 2006 and on the basis 
described  in  the  Large  and  Medium-sized  Companies  and 
Groups  (Accounts  and  Reports)  (Amendments)  Regulations 
2013  and  the  UKLA's  Listing  Rules.    The  policy  has  been 
developed  taking  into  account  the  principles  of  the  UK 
Corporate  Governance  Code  and  the  voting  guidelines  of 
major UK institutional investor bodies.  

This Remuneration Policy will be put to a binding shareholder 
vote  at  the  AGM  on  28  April  2016.  If  the  revised  Policy  is 
approved,  it  will  take  immediate  effect  and  it  is  currently 
intended that it will apply for the three year period following 
approval.

result of the 2015 remuneration review, the key policy changes 
being  proposed  to  our  remuneration  policy  for  Executive 
Directors are:

Annual bonus:

•  Any bonus above 100% of salary will need to be deferred in 

shares and subject to a two year holding period;

•  Greater  flexibility  on  the  choice  of  performance  metrics 
each year will be introduced subject to the majority being 
on financial objectives;

•  Recovery  and  withholding  provisions  will  be  introduced 
and  will  apply  to  both  the  cash  and  deferred  bonus 
elements.

Long-Term Incentive Plan:

Details  of  how  the  Company  will  implement  the  Policy  are 
provided  in  the  Annual  Report  on  Remuneration  section 
starting on page 53.

• 

The  individual  limit  is  increased  from  150%  to  250%  of 
salary for the CEO, whilst retaining the existing cap of 150% 
of salary for other executive directors; 

Remuneration Policy objectives and 
proposed changes

The  objective  of  the  remuneration  policy  is  to  provide 
remuneration packages to each Executive Director that will:

•  Align rewards with the interests of shareholders;

•  Motivate and encourage superior performance;

•  Allow the Group to retain the talent needed to execute its 

business strategy; 

• 

• 

Enable  the  Group  to  be  competitive  when  recruiting 
appropriately skilled and experienced management; and

Ensure that the overall package for each Director is linked to 
strategic objectives of the Group.

The  Committee  is  conscious  of  good  UK  governance  and 
practice  and  therefore  believes  the  structure  of  pay  should 
include some additional features of market best practice. As a 

•  Greater  flexibility  on  the  choice  of  metrics  each  year  will 
be  introduced  to  support  the  Company’s  medium  term 
strategy, with at least one third on relative TSR;

•  A post-vesting holding period of 2 years will be introduced;

•  Recovery and withholding provisions will be introduced.

Share ownership:

•  A  200%  of  salary  share  ownership  guideline  will  be 
introduced,  where  it  is  expected  that  Executive  Directors 
build  and  maintain  a  holding  of  shares  to  the  value  of  at 
least 200% of salary within 5 years of the date of adoption 
of the 2016 Remuneration Policy or on appointment where 
later.

44

Annual Report 2015GovernanceThe remuneration policy for Directors

Our  policy  is  designed  to  offer  competitive,  but  not  excessive,  remuneration  structured  so  that  there  is  a  significant  weighting 
towards performance-based elements.  A significant proportion of our variable pay is delivered in shares with deferral and holding 
periods being mandatory, and with appropriate recovery and withholding provisions in place to safeguard against overpayments in 
the event of certain negative events occurring.   The table below provides a full summary of the policy elements for the Company’s 
Directors.    

Framework used to  
assess Performance

The Committee reviews the 
salaries of Executive Directors 
each year taking due account 
of all the factors described 
in how the salary policy 
operates.

Element

Base salary

Purpose and  
link to strategy

Operation

Maximum opportunity

Essential to 
recruit and retain 
executives of a high 
calibre.

Salaries are paid monthly. They are 
reviewed annually and normally 
fixed for 12 months commencing 
1 January.   

Reflects an 
individual's 
experience, role and 
performance.

In deciding appropriate levels, the 
Committee takes into account:

• 

• 

• 

The role, experience, 
responsibility and 
performance (individual and 
Group);

increases applied to the 
broader workforce; and

relevant market information 
for similar roles in broadly 
similar UK listed companies and 
companies of a similar size.  

Periodic account of practice in 
comparable companies in terms of 
size and complexity will be taken 
(e.g. comparable technology sector 
peers and pan-sector companies of 
a broadly similar size). 

The Committee considers the 
impact of any salary increase on 
the total remuneration package 
prior to awarding any increases.

There is no prescribed 
maximum.

Generally, the Committee is 
guided by average increases 
across the workforce. However, 
higher increases (in percentage 
of salary terms) may be 
awarded on occasion, for 
example (but not limited to): 

•  where an individual is 
promoted or has been 
recruited on a below 
market rate, 

• 

in relation to a change 
in size, scale or scope 
of an individual’s role or  
responsibilities or in the 
size or complexity of the 
business or where salaries 
have fallen significantly 
below mid-market levels.

n/a

There is no prescribed 
maximum as costs may vary 
in accordance with market 
conditions.

HMRC tax-approved limits will 
apply to all employee share 
schemes.

Benefits

To provide 
competitive 
benefits to help 
recruit and retain 
executives.  

Benefits include:
•  Car or car allowance
Private medical insurance
• 
• 
Life assurance
•  Health insurance

Executive Directors are also eligible 
to participate in the all-employee 
HMRC approved share schemes 
on the same basis as other 
employees.

Any reasonable business related 
expenses (including tax thereon) 
can be reimbursed if determined 
to be a taxable benefit. Relocation 
or related expenses may be 
offered including tax equalisation 
to ensure the executive is no 
better or worse off.

Executive Directors may be offered 
other benefits if considered 
appropriate and reasonable by the 
Committee.

45

GovernanceGovernanceGovernanceElement

Pension

Annual bonus

Purpose and  
link to strategy

To provide 
retirement benefits 
in line with the 
overall Company 
policy.

To motivate 
executives and 
incentivise the 
achievement of 
annual financial 
and/or strategic 
business targets. 
To ensure further 
alignment with 
shareholders 
through the 
retention of 
deferred equity.

46

Operation

Maximum opportunity

Framework used to  
assess Performance

Directors are eligible to receive 
employer contributions to the 
Company's pension plan (which is 
a defined contribution plan) or a 
salary supplement in lieu of pension 
benefits or a mixture of both.

Bonus payment is determined by 
the Committee after the year end, 
based on performance against 
targets set prior to the start of 
the year.  Targets are reviewed 
annually.

Bonuses up to 100% of salary will 
be payable in cash. Any bonus 
earned in excess of 100% of 
salary will normally be deferred in 
shares.  Deferred shares vest after 
two years subject to continued 
employment but no further 
performance targets.  

A dividend equivalent provision 
allows the Committee to pay 
dividend equivalents on deferred 
shares (in cash or shares) up to the 
date of vesting. This may assume 
the reinvestment of dividends on a 
cumulative basis.  

Bonus payments, including 
deferred bonus awards, are subject 
to recovery and withholding 
provisions in the event of financial 
misstatement, error or gross 
misconduct.

Participation in the bonus plan, 
and all bonus payments, are at the 
discretion of the Committee.

12% of salary p.a.

n/a

The maximum award under 
the annual bonus scheme is 
150% of salary.

Performance metrics are 
selected annually based on the 
Company's strategic objectives.  
The bonus will be based on the 
achievement of an appropriate 
mix of challenging financial, 
strategic or personal targets. 
Measures and weightings may 
change each year to reflect 
any year-on-year changes to 
business priorities.

Financial measures will represent 
the majority of bonus, with 
clearly defined non-financial 
targets representing the balance 
(if any).  

For financial metrics, a sliding 
scale of targets is normally set 
by the Committee, taking into 
account factors such as the 
business outlook for the year. 

•  Nothing is payable for 
performance below 
a minimum level of 
performance. 

•  Up to 25% of this 

part of the bonus is 
payable for meeting a 
demanding target with 
maximum bonus payable 
for achieving a more 
demanding target.

•  Where non-financial 

targets operate, it may not 
always be practicable to 
set targets on a graduated 
scale. Where these operate, 
not more than 25% will be 
payable for achieving the 
threshold target.

The metrics, and proportion 
of bonus that can be earned 
against each metric, will 
be disclosed in the Annual 
Remuneration Report each 
year for the following year.

The calculation of the annual 
bonuses from the actual 
performance achieved against 
each bonus target will be 
described retrospectively 
each year in the Annual 
Remuneration Report.

Annual Report 2015GovernanceElement

Purpose and  
link to strategy

Operation

Maximum opportunity

The maximum annual award 
that can be made in any given 
financial year is 250% of salary 
for the Chief Executive Officer 
and 150% of salary for other 
Executive Directors.

2016 Long-Term 
Incentive Plan

Incentivises 
selected employees 
and Executive 
Directors to 
achieve successful 
execution of 
business strategy 
over the longer 
term.

Provides long-term 
retention.

Aligns the interests 
of the Executives 
and shareholders.

Awards are normally granted 
annually in the form of nil cost 
options, conditional share 
or forfeitable share awards. 
Participation and individual award 
levels will be determined annually 
at the discretion of the Committee 
within the policy.  

Award levels will be subject to the 
individual limit and will take into 
account matters such as market 
practice, overall remuneration, the 
performance of the Company and 
the Executive being granted the 
award. 

Awards normally vest after three 
years subject to the achievement 
of stretching performance 
conditions and continued 
employment.  

Awards are subject to recovery 
and withholding provisions in the 
event of financial misstatement, 
error or gross misconduct.

A holding period will apply under 
which all participants are required 
to retain their net of tax vested 
awards for two years post vesting.

A dividend equivalent provision 
allows the Committee to pay 
dividend equivalents, at the 
Committee's discretion, on vested 
awards (in cash or shares) up to 
the point of exercise or sale (but 
no later than the expiry of the 
holding period). This may assume 
the reinvestment of dividends on a 
cumulative basis.

Framework used to  
assess Performance

A combination of financial 
performance (amongst EPS 
growth, EBITDA to cash 
conversion, cash flow, return 
on invested capital or any 
other of the Company’s 
Key Performance Indicators  
which may change during 
the policy window) and 
relative total shareholder 
return may be used to ensure 
that rewards are linked 
to long-term shareholder 
value creation. The financial 
metrics chosen from the 
above list each year will be 
those considered by the 
Committee at the time of 
each grant to be most likely 
to support the Company's 
long-term growth strategy.  

The use of TSR aligns with 
the Company’s focus on 
shareholder value creation 
and rewards management 
for outperformance of sector 
peers. At least one third of 
an award will be subject to a 
relative TSR measure each year. 
No part of the award subject 
to relative TSR will pay out until 
the return is at least equal to 
the median of the peer group. 

Where EPS growth is used 
it will continue to be 
based on profit after share 
based payment charges to 
executives and employees 
are deducted.

Performance below the 
threshold target will result 
in zero vesting for each 
performance measure.  No 
more than 25% of the award 
vests for achieving threshold 
performance. 100% of the 
award vests for maximum 
performance. There is no 
opportunity to retest.

In determining the target 
range for a financial metric, 
the Committee ensures it 
is challenging by taking 
into account current and 
anticipated trading conditions, 
the long-term business plan 
and external expectations.

Performance periods will 
normally start from the 
beginning of the financial 
year in which the award is 
made.

See Note 1.

47

GovernanceGovernanceGovernanceElement

Purpose and  
link to strategy

Operation

Maximum opportunity

Framework used to  
assess Performance

Maximum award of 150% of 
salary.

Performance period is 3 
years. 

TSR – must at least match 
that of the FTSE 250 index 
over the performance period.

EPS – must increase by 
at least inflation + 3% 
per annum during the 
performance period by 
reference to the Consumer 
Prices Index.

Neither the Non-Executive 
Chairman nor the Non-
Executive Directors are 
eligible for any performance 
related remuneration.

There is no prescribed 
maximum, however, any 
increase to fees will be 
considered in light of the 
expected time commitment in 
performing the roles, increases 
received by the wider 
workforce and market rates in 
comparable companies.

2011 Long Term 
Incentive Plan

To motivate and 
incentivise delivery 
of sustained 
performance linked 
to the Company’s 
strategy; aligning 
Executive Directors’ 
interests with those 
of shareholders.

Non-Executive 
Chairman and 
Non-Executive 
Directors’ fees

To attract and 
retain a high quality 
Chairman and 
experienced Non-
Executive Directors.

The Company will make no future 
grants under this plan if this 
remuneration policy and the 2016 
LTIP are approved by shareholders 
at the 2016 AGM.

Awards of share-based incentives 
are made annually, vesting over 
3 years. Vesting is subject to 
comparative Total Shareholder 
Return and Earnings per Share 
targets. The Remuneration 
Committee has discretion to 
decide whether and to what 
extent targets have been met, and 
if an exceptional event occurs that 
causes the Committee to consider 
that the targets are no longer 
appropriate, the Committee may 
adjust them.

The Non-Executive Chairman 
receives a single fee covering all 
his duties. The Non-executive 
Directors receive a basic fee 
and additional fees payable for 
chairing the Audit, Nomination 
and Remuneration Committees 
and for performing the Senior 
Independent Director role.

The Chairman and Non-Executive 
Directors shall be entitled to 
have reimbursed all expenses 
that they reasonably incur in 
the performance of their duties, 
including those expenses that 
have been deemed to be taxable 
benefits by HMRC (or equivalent 
body). This includes any personal 
tax that may become due on 
those expenses.

The level of fees of the Non-
Executive Directors reflects 
the time commitment and 
responsibility of their respective 
roles. Their fees are reviewed 
from time to time against broadly 
similar UK listed companies and 
companies of a similar size. 

In exceptional circumstances, 
additional fees may be payable 
to reflect a substantial increase 
in time commitment of the Non-
Executive Chairman and Directors.

Share  
ownership 
guidelines

To align the 
interests of 
management and 
shareholders and 
promote a long-
term approach to 
performance.

Executive Directors are expected 
to build and maintain a holding of 
shares to the value of at least 200% 
of base salary after five years from 
the latter of appointment date or 
approval date of this policy. 

n/a

n/a

48

Annual Report 2015GovernanceNotes 

1. 

2. 

 In exceptional circumstances, the Committee may in its discretion allow participants to sell, transfer, assign or dispose of some or all of these awards before the end 
of the holding period.

 The Committee is made aware of pay structures across the wider Group when setting the remuneration policy for Executive Directors.  The Committee considers the 
general basic salary increase for the broader employee population when determining the annual salary review for the Executive Directors.  Overall, the remuneration 
policy for the Executive Directors is more heavily weighted towards variable pay than for other employees.  This ensures that there is a clear link between the value 
created for shareholders and the remuneration received by the Executive Directors given it is the Executive Directors who are considered to have the greatest potential 
to influence Company value creation.  

3. 

 For the avoidance of doubt, in approving the Policy Report, authority is given to the Company to honour any commitments entered into with current or former 
Directors that have been disclosed previously to shareholders, for example the 2011 Long-Term Incentive Plan approved by Shareholders at the AGM on 20 April 2011. 

49

GovernanceGovernanceGovernanceBonus Plan and LTIP discretions

The  Committee  will  operate  the  annual  bonus  plan  and  LTIP 
according to their respective rules and in accordance with the 
Listing  Rules  and  HMRC  rules,  where  relevant.  A  copy  of  the 
LTIP rules is available on request from the Company Secretary. 
The  Committee,  consistent  with  market  practice,  retains 
discretion  over  a  number  of  areas  relating  to  the  operation 
and  administration  of  these  plans.    These  include  (but  are 
not limited to) the following (albeit with the level of award is 
restricted as set out in the policy table above):

•  Who participates in the plans;

• 

• 

The timing of grant of award and/or payment;

The size of an award and/or a payment;

•  Discretion relating to the measurement of performance in 

the event of a change of control or reconstruction;

•  Determination of a good leaver (in addition to any specified 
categories) for incentive plan purposes based on the rules 
of each plan and the appropriate treatment chosen;

•  Adjustments  required  in  certain  circumstances  (e.g.  rights 
issues, corporate restructuring, on a change of control and 
special dividends); and

• 

The  ability  to  adjust  existing  performance  conditions  for 
exceptional events, including any M&A activity so that they 
can  still  fulfil  their  original  purpose  whilst  being  no  less 
stretching. 

Remuneration scenarios for Executive 
Directors

The  Company's  policy  results  in  a  significant  portion  of 
remuneration received by Executive Directors being dependent 
on  Company  performance.  The  graph  below  illustrates  how 
the total pay opportunities for the Executive Directors for 2016 
vary under three performance scenarios: below target, target 
and maximum. 

s
0
0
0
£

£1400

£1200

£1000

£800

£600

£400

£200

£–

£612
33%

£662

38%

£412

£360

£786
25%

29%

£1,212

32%

38%

100%

67%

62%

100%

46%

30%

Below Target

Target
Chairman

Maximum

Below Target

Maximum

Target
CFO

LTIP

Bonus

Fixed Pay

Assumptions

Below Target:
• 

Executive Chairman: comprises fixed pay of 2016 basic 
salary and the value of benefits in 2015; he does not 
participate in the Company's pension plan. 

Maximum: 
• 

Executive Chairman: comprises fixed pay and assumes 
maximum payout of bonus of 62.5% of salary.

•  CFO: fixed pay and assumes 150% of salary payout of 

bonus and LTI vesting of 125% of salary.

•  CFO: fixed pay of 2016 basic salary, the value of benefits 
in 2015 and a 12% Company pension contribution.

No account has been taken of any changes in the 
Company's share price.

Target: 
• 

Executive Chairman: comprises fixed pay and assumes 
bonus  payout  of  50%  of  salary. The  Chairman  will  not 
receive any long term incentive awards in 2016.

•  CFO:  fixed  pay  and  assumes  bonus  payout  of  75%  of 
maximum and 50% of the LTIP vests (assuming a 125% 
of salary grant).

50

Annual Report 2015GovernanceRecruitment and Promotion policy

The remuneration package for a new director will be established 
in accordance with the Company's approved policy subject to 
such modifications as are set out below.

Salary  levels  for  Executive  Directors  will  be  set  in  accordance 
with the Company's remuneration policy, taking into account 
the experience and calibre of the individual and their existing 
remuneration  package.  Where  it  is  appropriate  to  offer  a 
lower salary initially, a series of increases to the desired salary 
positioning  may  be  made  over  subsequent  years  subject  to 
individual performance and development in the role.  Benefits 
will generally be provided in line with the approved policy, with 
relocation or other related expenses provided for if necessary. 
A pension contribution or cash in lieu of up to 12 per cent of 
salary may be provided.

The  structure  of  variable  pay  elements  will  be  in  accordance 
with  the  Company's  approved  policy  detailed  above.    The 
maximum  variable  pay  opportunity  will  be  as  set  out  in  the 
remuneration  policy  table,  being  150%  of  salary  under  the 
annual bonus plan and awards with a face value of up to 250% 
of salary under the LTIP for a CEO role and 150% of salary for 
other  Executive  Directors.    Different  performance  measures 
may be set initially for the annual bonus in the year of joining, 
taking  into  account  the  responsibilities  of  the  individual, 
and  the  point  in  the  financial  year  that  he  or  she  joined  the 
Board. The bonus will be pro-rated to reflect the proportion of 
the financial year served. An LTIP award can be made shortly 
following an appointment (assuming the Company is not in a 
close period).

In  the  case  of  external  recruitment,  if  it  is  necessary  to  buy 
out  incentive  pay  or  benefit  arrangements  (which  would 
be  forfeited  on  leaving  the  previous  employer),  this  may  be 
provided, taking into account the form (cash or shares), timing 
and  expected  value  (i.e.  likelihood  of  meeting  any  existing 
performance  criteria)  of  the  remuneration  being  forfeited.  
Replacement  share  awards,  if  used,  may  be  granted  using 
the  Company's  existing  share  plans  to  the  extent  possible, 
although  awards  may  also  be  granted  outside  of  these 
schemes  if  necessary  and  as  permitted  under  the  LSE  Listing 
Rules.  The aim of any such award would be to ensure that, as 

far as possible, the expected value and structure of the award 
will be no more generous than the amount forfeited.

In the case of an internal recruitment, any outstanding variable 
pay  awarded  in  relation  to  the  previous  role  will  be  allowed 
to  pay  out  according  to  its  terms  of  grant  or  adjusted  as 
considered desirable to reflect the new role.

Fees for a new Chairman or Non-Executive Director will be set 
in line with the approved policy.

Service contracts and payments for loss of office

The Company's policy is to have service contracts for Executive 
Directors that continue indefinitely unless determined by their 
notice period. Under the Executive Directors' service contracts 
and, in line with the policy for new appointments, no more than 
12 months' notice of termination of employment is required by 
either party. Service contracts are available for inspection at the 
Company's registered office.

All  Non-Executive  Directors  have  letters  of  appointment  with 
the  Company  for  an  initial  period  of  three  years,  subject  to 
annual  re-appointment  at  the  AGM.  Appointments  may  be 
terminated with three months' notice. The appointment letters 
for the Chairman and Non-Executive Directors provide that no 
compensation  is  payable  on  termination,  other  than  accrued 
fees  and  expenses.  Letters  of  appointment  are  available  for 
inspection at the Company's registered office.

For  the  period  David  Clayton  is  acting  as  interim  Executive 
Chairman, he will be paid a salary and be eligible to participate in 
the annual bonus plan (subject to a 62.5% of salary maximum). 
He will not receive any pension or awards under the LTIP. He 
will receive a car allowance and will remain on a three month 
notice period, in line with his letter of appointment. 

In accordance with the terms of the UK Corporate Governance 
Code  all  Directors  submit  themselves  for  re-election  at  the 
Annual  General  Meeting  each  year.  Service  contracts  and 
letters  of  appointment  are  available  for  inspection  at  the 
Company's  registered  office.  Details  of  the  service  contracts 
with  all  Executive  Directors  and  letters  of  appointment  with 
Non–Executive Directors are as follows:

Name

David Clayton

Dominic Lavelle

Chris Batterham

Glenn Collinson

Mandy Gradden

Alan McWalter

Contract date

Notice period

1 July 2013 as (Chairman)

18 November 2013

15 October 1999

1 June 2014

30 January 2012

1 March 2014

3 months

12 months

3 months

3 months

3 months

3 months

51

GovernanceGovernanceGovernanceHow shareholder views are taken into account 

The  Remuneration  Committee  is  committed  to  ensuring  an 
open  dialogue  with  our  shareholders  and  therefore,  where 
changes  are  being  made  to  the  remuneration  policy  or 
where  there  is  a  material  change  in  the  way  we  operate  our 
policy,  we  will  consult  with  major  shareholders  in  advance.  
The  Remuneration  Committee  adopted  such  an  approach 
in  putting  together  this  revised  policy  by  consulting  the 
Company's  largest  shareholders  and  shareholder  advisory 
bodies beforehand.  

In  addition,  the  Committee  considers  shareholder  feedback 
received in relation to the AGM each year and guidance from 
shareholder representative bodies more generally. 

Consideration of employment conditions elsewhere in 
the Group

Whilst the Committee does not consult directly with employees 
on  the  Directors’  Remuneration  Policy,  the  Committee  does 
increases  and 
receive  periodic  updates  regarding  salary 
remuneration  arrangements  across  the  Group.   This  is  borne 
in  mind  when  determining  the  remuneration  policy  for  the 
Executive Directors. 

External Non-Executive Director appointments

Executive  Directors  are  permitted  to  serve  as  Non-Executive 
Directors  of  other  companies  where  there  is  no  competition 
with the Company’s business activities and where these duties 
do  not  interfere  with  the  individual’s  ability  to  perform  his 
duties for the Company.

For  Executive  Directors,  the  Company  may,  in  its  absolute 
discretion,  at  any  time  after  notice  is  served  by  either  party, 
terminate a Directors' contract with immediate effect by paying 
an amount equal to base salary for the then unexpired period 
of notice plus the fair value of contractual benefits subject to 
the deduction of tax. 

An  Executive  Director's  service  contract  may  be  terminated 
without  notice  for  certain  events  such  as  gross  misconduct 
or a serious breach of contract. No payment or compensation 
beyond salary (and the value of holiday entitlement) accrued 
up  to  the  date  of  termination  will  be  made  if  such  an  event 
occurs.

There  are  no  special  provisions  relating  to  change  of  control. 
The  policy  on  termination  is  that  the  Group  does  not  make 
payments  beyond 
the 
Committee ensures that there are no unjustified payments for 
failure.

its  contractual  obligations  and 

Any statutory payments required by law will be made.

Treatment of incentives

illness, 

(such  as  death, 

There is no automatic or contractual right to a bonus payment. 
At  the  discretion  of  the  Committee,  for  certain  good  leaver 
circumstances 
injury,  disability, 
redundancy, retirement, his employing company ceasing to be 
a Group Company or the undertaking business or division for 
which he or she works being sold out of the Company's Group, 
or  any  other  circumstances  at  the  discretion  Committee),  a 
pro rata bonus may become payable at the normal payment 
date  for  the  period  of  employment  and  based  on  full  year 
performance.  Should  the  Committee  decide  to  make  a 
payment  in  such  circumstances,  the  rationale  would  be  fully 
disclosed in the Annual Report on Remuneration. 

The  treatment  of  share-based  incentives  previously  granted 
to an Executive Director will be determined based on the plan 
rules.    The  default  treatment  will  be  for  outstanding  awards 
to lapse on cessation of employment.  However, an executive 
will be treated as a 'good leaver' under certain circumstances 
such as death, illness, injury, disability, redundancy, retirement, 
his  employing  company  ceasing  to  be  a  Group  Company 
or  the  undertaking  business  or  division  for  which  he  or  she 
works  being  sold  out  of  the  Company's  Group,  or  any  other 
circumstances at the discretion of the Committee.  

Under  the  Deferred  Share  Bonus  Plan,  if  treated  as  a  good 
leaver,  awards  will  normally  vest  on  the  original  vesting  date 
and will not normally be subject to a pro rata reduction (unless 
the Committee determines otherwise). 

Under  the  LTIP,  if  treated  as  a  good  leaver,  awards  will  vest 
at  the  normal  vesting  date  subject  to  the  extent  to  which 
performance  targets  have  been  achieved.  The  number  of 
LTIP  awards  that  would  normally  vest  will  be  reduced  pro-
rata  to  reflect  the  proportion  of  the  three  year  performance 
period actually elapsed unless the Committee at its discretion 
determines otherwise.

Vested awards that remain subject to a holding period are not 
forfeitable.

52

Annual Report 2015GovernanceAnnual Report on Remuneration

This  Annual  Report  on  Remuneration  (and  the  Chairman's 
Annual Statement) will be put to a single advisory shareholder 
vote at the 2016 AGM.  The information below includes out how 
we  intend  to  operate  our  revised  policy  in  2016  and  the  pay 
outcomes in respect of the 2015 financial year. The information 
from  the  single  total  remuneration  figures  for  Directors  on 
page  54 has been audited. The remainder is unaudited.

Implementation of Remuneration Policy  
in 2016

The  Committee  carried  out  a  comprehensive  review  of 
executive remuneration in the last quarter of 2015 instigated 
by the process of changing our CEO. Whilst we continue the 
search for a new CEO, David Clayton will continue to assume 
the  role  of  Executive  Chairman.  The  departure  of  Mark 
Lancaster has resulted in Dominic Lavelle’s role as CFO taking 
on greater prominence on an ongoing basis and the changes 
to his remuneration, as set out below, reflect this.

Subject  to  approval  of  the  remuneration  policy  at  the  2016 
AGM,  details  of  how  we  will  operate  the  policy  in  2016  are 
provided below.

Salaries

David Clayton's fee was increased to £400,000 p.a. in October 
2015 to reflect his interim executive role. This fee is £100,000 less 
than the departing CEO’s salary. In 2016, David will continue to 
be paid a fee of £400,000 p.a. until a new CEO is appointed.

Dominic  Lavelle  has  performed  very  strongly  in  his  role  of 
CFO since he joined us in November 2013. In the light of this 
performance, the broadening of his role to include additional 
responsibilities such as the re-alignment of the cost base and 
the  sale  process  for  non-core  assets  announced  in  January 
2016 and his overall importance and value to the Company, the 
Committee  decided  to  increase  Dominic's  salary  to  £310,000 
(2015: £280,000) with effect from 1 October 2015. Dominic will 
not receive an increase in 2016 and his next salary review will 
be effective from 1 January 2017. 

Pension and Benefits

The  CFO  will  continue  to  receive  a  company  pension 
contribution of 12% of basic salary. The Executive Chairman will 
not receive a pension contribution. 

Benefits will be provided in line with the approved remuneration 
policy.

Annual bonus

As  described  in  the  Policy  Report,  the  maximum  bonus 
opportunity  is  capped  at  150%  of  base  salary.  In  accordance 
with the new policy, any bonus payable in excess of 100% of 
salary will be deferred in shares.  The deferred shares will vest 
after two years, subject to continued employment.

The  metrics  and  their  weightings  for  the  year  ending  31 
December 2016 are:

Executive Chairman

Profit before tax, 
amortisation and 
one-offs

Revenue

Personal objectives

30%

30%

40%

CFO

37.5%

37.5%

25% 

Profit before tax, amortisation and one-offs is the key financial 
performance indicator at SDL and revenue ensures there is a 
focus on top line growth. 

Nothing will be payable for performance below the threshold  
level of performance,.

For  the  Executive  Chairman  15%  of  salary  is  payable  for 
achieving  the  bonus  threshold,  50%  of  salary  is  payable  for 
achieving  the  bonus  target  and  the  maximum  of  62.5%  of 
salary is payable for achieving the stretch levels of performance.

For the CFO 15% of salary is payable for achieving the bonus 
threshold,  75%  of  salary  is  payable  for  achieving  the  bonus 
target  and  the  maximum  of  150%  of  salary  is  payable  for 
achieving the stretch levels of performance.

The targets themselves are deemed to be commercially sensitive 
and  have  not  been  disclosed  prospectively.  However,  full 
retrospective disclosure of the targets and performance against 
them will be provided in next year's remuneration report.

Long-term incentives

The intention is to make awards under the 2016 LTIP to senior 
executives in line with policy. The Executive Chairman will not 
receive  an  award  and  the  CFO’s  award  will  be  over  nil-cost 
options with a face value of 125% of salary.

Half of the awards will be subject to EPS growth targets and the 
other half subject to a relative Total Shareholder Return measure. 
Each element will be assessed independently of the other.  

EPS Growth

The awards will vest according to the following schedule:

Adjusted, fully diluted EPS for 
FY2018

Proportion of Awards subject 
to EPS growth that vest

Less than 27p in 2018.

27p in 2018.

39p or higher

0%

25%

100%

Pro-rata vesting between the threshold and stretch performance 
points

53

GovernanceGovernanceGovernanceThe  Committee  believes  the  above  range  is  appropriately 
stretching in light of internal and external forecasts. 

TSR performance 

Proportion of Awards subject 
to TSR that vest

Relative TSR targets

The  performance  condition  applying  to  the  other  half  of 
LTIP  awards  will  be  based  on  SDL’s  Total  Shareholder  Return 
performance  over  a  measurement  period  running  from  1 
January 2016 to 31 December 2018.

The  TSR  of  the  Company  will  be  compared  to  that  of  the 
constituents of the FTSE Small Cap Index  (excluding Investment 
Trusts)  over the performance period, and will vest according to 
the following schedule: 

Below Median

Median ranking 

0%

25%

Upper Quartile ranking or higher

100%

Pro-rata vesting for performance between median and upper 
quartile

For  the  2016  award,  vested  awards  will  be  subject  to  a  post-
vesting  holding  period  of  two  years.   This  requires  Executive 
Directors to hold on to the net of tax number of vested awards 
for a period of two years following vesting.

Single total remuneration figure for Directors

Information subject to audit.

The following table presents a single total remuneration figure for 2015 for the Executive and Non-Executive Directors.

Fixed Pay

Pay for Performance

Salary 
£000’s

Benefits(a) 
£000’s

Pension 
£000’s

Annual 
Bonus(b) 
£000’s

LTIP(c) 
£000’s

Other(d)  
£000’s 

Total 
Remuneration 
£000’s

Chairman / Executive Chairman

David Clayton(e)

Executive Directors

Dominic Lavelle

Mark Lancaster(f )

Non–Executive Directors

Chris Batterham

Joe Campbell

Mandy Gradden

Alan McWalter

Glenn Collinson

John Matthews*

2015

2014

2015

2014

2015

2014

2015

2014

2015

2014

2015

2014

2015

2014

2015

2014

2015

2014

152.5

70.0

287.5

280.0

416.7

500.0

40.0

40.0

–

24.0

45.0

45.0

45.0

37.5

45.0

26.3

12.0

30.0

3.0

–

12.7

12.5

32.2

38.6

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

34.5

33.6

53.4

64.0

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

100.0

154.8

–

682.5

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

591.7

714.6

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

155.5

70.0

434.7

480.9

1,808.6

1,285.1

40.0

40.0

–

24.0

45.0

45.0

45.0

37.5

45.0

26.3

12.0

30.0

* consultant to the Board throughout 2015.

(a)  Taxable benefits for the year included: Car allowance, Private medical insurance, Life assurance and Health insurance.

(b)   Discretion was exercised to pay a cash bonus to Dominic Lavelle for his 2015 performance.

(c)  See ‘Loss of office payments’ for details of LTIP vesting.

(d)  Contractual loss of office payment see ‘Loss of office payments’ for details. 

(e)  David Clayton’s 2015 fees are split as follows: As Chairman (1 January to 31 September) £49,500; as Executive Chairman (1 October to 31 December) £103,000.

(f ) 

 Mark Lancaster ceased employment on 31 October 2015; up until the date of cessation he received 10 months payment in respect of salary, pension contribution, 
taxable benefits and holiday entitlements.

54

Annual Report 2015Governance2015 annual bonus

The 2015 bonus was based on PBTA and revenue performance. Directors were eligible to an additional over-performance pay-out if 
the Group over achieves on its target bookings. No bonus is payable if either of the PBTA or Bookings growth thresholds are not met.

PBTA

Revenue

Bookings growth

Threshold1

£22m

£265m

10%

Target 2

£25m

£290m

14%

Maximum 3

2015 Actual 

£30m

£335m

24%

£13.9m

£266.9m

– 4.9%

1 40% of salary payable for threshold PBTA and 0% for threshold Revenue. A bonus multiplier of 0.2 applies for threshold bookings growth performance.
2 50% of salary payable for target PBTA and 50% for target Revenue. A bonus multiplier of 1.0 applies for target bookings growth performance.
3 75% of salary payable for maximum PBTA and 0% for maximum Revenue. A bonus multiplier of 2 applies for maximum (stretch) bookings growth performance.

As bookings growth and PBTA were below threshold, no bonus became payable. However, under the terms of the approved policy, 
the Committee has used the discretion available to it in exceptional circumstances and has amended the bonus outcome to reflect 
Dominic  Lavelle’s  exceptional  contribution  in  2015.  In  2015,  Dominic  demonstrated  exceptional  performance  and  undertook 
additional responsibilities which later included leading the restructuring that was announced in early 2016. Reflecting this strong 
performance together with Dominic’s overall importance to the Company and the leadership he has shown since the change in the 
Executive Board, the Committee decided to award Dominic a £100,000 bonus in respect of his exceptional contribution in 2015. The 
Committee determined that it was appropriate to use this discretion as permitted under the policy.  

David Clayton did not receive a bonus for the part of the year he was acting as interim Executive Chairman.

Outstanding Long-Term Incentive Plan awards

Details of the nil cost option awards, not yet vested and exercised, made under the LTIP are disclosed in the table below:

Director

Award  
grant date 

Share price 
at grant 
(pence)

As at  
1 Jan 2015

Granted 
during year

Lapsed 
during year

Vested and 
exercised 
during year

As at  
31 Dec 2015

Earliest date  
shares can 
be acquired

Latest date 
shares can 
be acquired

Dominic Lavelle

7 Apr 2014

333.5

83,958

0

17 Apr 2015 444.75

0

62,957

0

0

0

0

83,958

62,957

7 Apr 2017

7 Apr 2024

17 Apr 2018 17 Apr 2025

The 2014 and 2015 awards will vest subject to a relative TSR measured against the FTSE 250 Index and an EPS growth target measured 
relative to the Consumer Price Index. The performance period for both awards will be measured over the three financial years ending 
31 December 2015, 2016 and 2017 respectively.

• 

• 

TSR – No part of this award vests if performance is below the Index, 25 per cent vests for achieving performance in line with the 
Index, with 100 per cent vesting for performance 2 x the Index performance with straight line vesting in between.

EPS - must increase by at least inflation + 3% per annum during the performance period (with inflation measured by reference 
to the Consumer Prices Index).

If one or both of these minimum levels of performance are not achieved the 2015 award will lapse.

The 2015 award granted to Dominic Lavelle was based on 100% of salary grant and had a face value of £280,000.

Directors’ interest in shares 

55

GovernanceGovernanceGovernanceTo align the interests of senior management with those of shareholders further, it is proposed that Executive Directors will be subject 
to share ownership guidelines following the approval of this policy. Executive Directors will be required to accumulate a holding 
of Ordinary Shares in the Company to the value of 200 per cent of their salary. Until the guideline is met, the Executive is expected 
to retain 50 per cent of shares acquired under the Company's share plans (after allowing for tax and national insurance liabilities). 

 The interests of the Directors in the share capital of SDL PLC at 31 December 2015 are set out below. 

Name of director

Owned

LTIP  awards

SAYE

Total

% of salary 
held under 
Shareholding 
Policy1

31.12.14

31.12.15

Unvested

Vested

Unvested

Vested

31.12.15

31.12.15

Executive Directors 

Dominic Lavelle

David Clayton

30,000

40,000

Non-Executive Directors

30,000

146,915

113,950

Chris Batterham

86,895

100,000

Glenn Collinson

Mandy Gradden

Alan McWalter

Former Director

0

7,500

0

0

7,500

0

Mark Lancaster

1,381,187

1,381,187*

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

176,915

113,950

100,000

0

7,500

0

40%

119%

n/a

n/a

n/a

n/a

n/a

* Mark Lancaster left employment on 31 October 2015 and the closing 2015 value reflects his owned shares upon cessation of employment.

 There has been no change in the interests set out above between 31 December 2015 and 15 March 2016.

1   The Directors’ interest guideline was introduced in 2016 and the Committee will review progress against the guideline going forward. Figures 
above have been calculated using the share price as at 31 December 2015, 417p.

Loss of office payments 

Mark Lancaster stepped down as CEO on 1 October 2015 and 
ceased  employment  on  31  October  2015.  He  continued  to 
receive his contractual salary and benefits until his employment 
ceased. In line with his contract, Mark received a payment in 
lieu of notice, comprising: 

•  £458,333 in respect of 11 months' salary for the remainder 

of his contractual notice period; 

•  £55,000 in respect of 11 months' pensions contribution for 

the remainder of his contractual notice period; 

•  £35,479  in  respect  of  11  months'  taxable  benefits  for  the 

remainder of his contractual notice period; 

•  £78,335 to settle any claim arising upon the cessation of his 

employment; and

•  £87,423 in lieu of accrued but not taken holiday entitlement 

and expenses incurred.

• 

Taking into account the Company's performance from the 
commencement of the performance period to the cessation 

of his employment, amongst other factors, including Mark's 
individual performance discretion was applied to calculate 
the  vesting  of  outstanding  LTIP  awards  and  then  a  pro-
rating for the proportion of the performance period served 
was applied such that:

 ¶ 2013 award - all 178,571 unvested awards will lapse 
with effect from the cessation of his employment. 
 ¶ 2014  award  -  the  award  shall  vest  as  to  103,073 
shares out of a total of 224,887 on the cessation of his 
employment and the remainder shall lapse. 

 ¶ 2015 award - the award shall vest as to 35,132 shares 
out  of  a  total  of  168,634  on  the  cessation  of  his 
employment and the remainder shall lapse. 

 ¶ Under  the  settlement  agreement  signed  with  Mr 
Lancaster,  he  shall  be  entitled  to  be  treated  in  a 
comparable manner with respect to bonus payments 
in respect of the 2015 financial year that are awarded 
to other Executive Directors. 

56

Annual Report 2015Governance 
Relative importance of spend on pay

The following table sets out the percentage change in dividends and overall spend of employee pay in the 2015 financial year 
compared with the prior year.

Dividends

Total return to shareholders

Employee remuneration costs

Percentage change in CEO pay

2015 
£m

2.5

2.5

145.0

2014 
£m

2.0

2.0

141.3

% change

25

25

3

The table above shows the percentage year on year change in the value of salary, benefits and annual bonus for the Chief Executive 
between the current and previous year compared to that of the average employee on a full time equivalent basis.

Chief Executive (£000s)

•  Salary

•  Benefits

•  Bonus

Full time equivalent average UK employee (£)(1)

•  Salary

•  Benefits

•  Bonus

2015

2014

% change

*519.7

32.2

0 

49.2

1.7

10.0

**500.0

38.6

682.5

47.6

1.2

9.8

+3.9

– 8.8

-100.0

+3.4

+41.7

+1.8

*Mark Lancaster and David Clayton    |    **Mark Lancaster

(1) There are 515 UK employees at 31 December 2015 (31 December 2014: 506) , of which 26 (2014: 25) were part time. 

Performance graph and single figure table

The following graph shows the Company's TSR performance over the last seven financial years against the FTSE 250 Index (excluding 
investment  trusts)  and  the  FTSE  SmallCap  Index  (excluding  investment  trusts). These  indices  have  been  chosen  as  they  include 
companies of a broadly comparable size to SDL PLC.

Total Shareholder Return
400

Source: Thomson Reuters

350

300

250

200

150

100

31 Dec 
2008

31 Dec 
2009

31 Dec
2010

31 Dec
2011

31 Dec
2012

31 Dec
2013

31 Dec
2014

31 Dec
2015

This graph shows the value, by 31 December 2015, of £100 invested in SDL on 31 December 2008 compared with the value of £100 
invested in the FTSE 250 Index excluding Investment trusts and FTSE Small Cap Index excluding Investment trusts, on a yearly basis.

SDL

FTSE 250 Ex Investment Trusts

FTSE Small Cap  Ex Investment Trusts

57

GovernanceGovernanceGovernanceThe table below shows the total remuneration figure for the CEO and Executive Chairmen roles over the same seven year period. 
The total remuneration figure includes the annual bonus and LTIP awards with performance periods ending in or shortly after the 
relevant year ends.

CEO single total figure of 
remuneration (£000’s)

Bonus payout (%)

LTIP vesting (%)

2009

914

40

100

2010

954

44

100

2011

1,200

47

100

2012

729

24

71.5

2013

597

0

0

2014

1,285

53

0

2015

1,911

0

12013 =  0%
2014 = 46%
2015 = 21%

 1 Vesting percentages of Mark Lancaster’s outstanding LTIP awards at time of resignation.

During  the  year,  Towers  Watson  provided  assistance  with 
market data and benchmarking executive rewards; advice on 
market practice; and reward consultancy. Total fees charged in 
the  period  were  £50,248  + VAT  and  were  charged  on  a  time 
spent basis.

PricewaterhouseCoopers LLP acted as independent assessors 
for  testing  the  vesting  criteria  (TSR  and  EPS)  of  share-based 
incentives.

New  Bridge  Street  was  appointed  by  the  Remuneration 
Committee  in  2016  to  act  as  independent  advisor  to  the 
Committee  and  the  Committee  is  satisfied  that  New  Bridge 
Street's advice is objective and independent. Advice has been 
provided  since  January  2016  and  therefore,  no  fees  were 
charged in the 2015 financial period. 

Statement of shareholder voting at the AGM (Unaudited)

At 
last  year's  AGM,  the  Directors'  Remuneration  Report 
(Directors'  Remuneration  Policy  and  Annual  Report  on 
Remuneration) received the following votes from shareholders:

Annual Report on Remuneration 

For

Against

Abstentions

Total

Total number  
of votes

% of  
votes cast

52,308,243

15,528,077

1,147,464

68,983,784

77.1%

22.89%

n/a

On behalf of the Board

Glenn Collinson
Chairman of the Remuneration Committee]
15 March 2016

Membership of the Remuneration Committee

The  Code  requires  that  a  Group  of  the  size  of  SDL  PLC  has  a 
Remuneration  Committee  comprising  a  minimum  of  three 
non-executives. The Committee is chaired by Glenn Collinson. 
The other Committee members comprise Mandy Gradden and 
Alan McWalter.

The  Remuneration  Committee  members  have  no  personal 
financial interest, other than as shareholders, in matters to be 
decided,  no  potential  conflicts  of  interests  arising  from  cross 
directorships  and  no  day  to  day  involvement  in  running  the 
business.  The  Non-Executive  Directors  are  not  eligible  for 
pensions and do not participate in the Group’s bonus or share 
schemes. 

The  Remuneration  Committee  determines  and  agrees  with 
the Board, within formal terms of reference, the framework and 
policy  of  Directors’  and  senior  management’s  remuneration 
and  its  cost  to  the  Group.  The  Committee  considers  the 
performance  of  the  Executive  Directors  as  a  prelude  to 
recommending their annual remuneration, bonus awards and 
share awards to the Board for final approval. 

The  Committee  met  seven  times  during  the  year.  At  those 
meetings  basic  salaries  of  Executive  Directors  and  senior 
managers were reviewed, the targets and quantum of annual 
performance related bonuses for Directors were also agreed, as 
were  awards  granted  under  the  Group’s  Long-Term  Incentive 
Plan.  The  meetings  also  approved  the  payment  of  the  2014 
performance  related  bonus,  dealt  with  the  vesting  of  the 
shares  awarded  in  2012  under  the  LTIP  scheme  and  agreed 
the arrangements for the departing CEO and incoming interim 
Executive Chairman.  In the last quarter of 2015, the Committee 
carried  out  extensive  work  in  forming  a  new  remuneration 
policy for approval by shareholders at the AGM in 2016.

The  Committee  also  receives  advice  from  several  sources, 
namely:

• 

The  Executive  Chairman  who  attends  the  Remuneration 
Committee  by 
invitation  or  when  required  and  the 
Company  Secretary,  attends  meetings  when  required  as 
Secretary  to  the  Remuneration  Committee.  The  former 
Chief Executive attended the meetings upon invitation. No 
Executive Director takes part in discussions relating to their 
own remuneration and benefits.

58

Annual Report 2015GovernanceDirector’s Report

Introduction

Powers

The Directors of SDL PLC present their report together with the 
audited consolidated financial statements for the year ended 
31 December 2015.

The Company

SDL  PLC  is  the  ultimate  parent  company  of  the  SDL  Group 
which operates internationally.  SDL PLC is registered in England 
and Wales with the registered number 2675207.  The principal 
activities of the Group and its subsidiaries are described in the 
Strategic report on pages 4 to 27.

Responsibility Statement

As  required  under  the  Disclosure  and  Transparency  Rules 
(“DTR”),  a  statement  made  by  the  Board  regarding  the 
preparation  of  the  financial  statements  is  set  out  following 
this report which also provides details regarding the disclosure 
of  information  to  the  Company’s  auditor  and  management’s 
report on internal control over financial information.

Going Concern  

In line with UK Corporate Governance Code requirements the 
Directors have made enquiries concerning the potential of the 
business to continue as a going concern.  

The  Directors’  enquiries  included  a  review  of  performance  in 
2015, 2016 annual plans, a review of working capital including 
the  liquidity  position  and  a  review  of  current  indebtedness 
levels.  The  Directors  confirm  they  have  a 
reasonable 
expectation that the Group has adequate resources to continue 
in operational existence for the foreseeable future. Given this 
expectation they have continued to adopt the going concern 
basis in preparing the financial statements.

Corporate Governance Statement

The  information  required  by  the  DTR  can  be  found  in  the 
Corporate Governance Report on pages 30 to 34.

Strategic Report

The  Strategic  Report  is  set  out  on  pages  4  to  27  and  is 
incorporated into this Directors’ Report by reference.

Directors

Biographies

Biographies of the current Directors of the Company are given 
on pages 28 and 29.  The table on page 54 shows Directors who 
served during the year to 31 December 2015.  All those persons 
holding office as a Director of the Company will retire and offer 
themselves for re-election at the 2016 AGM.

The  powers  of  the  Directors  are  set  out  in  the  Company’s 
Articles of Association, plus those granted by special resolution 
at the AGM dated 27 April 2015 governing shares issuance.

Interests in contracts

As at the date of this report, there is no contract or arrangement 
with the Company or any of its subsidiaries that is significant in 
relation  to  the  business  of  the  Group  as  a  whole  in  which  a 
Director of the Company is materially interested.

Indemnification

The Company has entered into deeds of indemnity with each 
of its current Directors to the extent permitted by law and the 
Company’s articles of association, in respect of all losses arising 
out  of,  or  in  connection  with,  the  execution  of  their  powers, 
duties  and  responsibilities,  as  Directors  of  the  Company  or 
any of its subsidiaries.  These indemnities are Qualifying Third-
Party  indemnity  provisions  as  defined  in  section  234  of  the 
Companies Act 2006 and copies are available for inspection at 
the registered office of the Company during business hours.

Remuneration

Particulars of Directors’ remuneration are shown in the Directors’ 
Remuneration  Report.    Details  of  service  contracts  and  how 
a  change  of  control  will  affect  the  service  contracts  of  the 
Executive  Directors  are  also  summarised  within  the  Directors’ 
Remuneration  Report.    Executive  Directors’  contracts  do  not 
provide  for  extended  notice  periods  or  compensation  in  the 
event of termination or a change of control.

Annual General Meeting

Our  2016  AGM  will  be  held  at  9:30am  on Thursday    28  April 
2016 at DLA Piper UK LLP, 1 London Wall, London EC2Y 5EA.  The 
notice of the 2016 AGM will be made available to shareholders 
and will also be published on the Group website www.sdl.com 
/About Us / Investor Relations / AGM.

The  Directors  consider  that  all  the  AGM  resolutions  are  in 
the  best  interests  of  the  Company  and  they  recommend 
unanimously that all shareholders vote in favour, as they intend 
to do in respect of their own shareholdings.

Results and Dividends

The Group’s Consolidated Income Statement appears on page 
68 and note 3 shows the contribution to revenue and profits 
made by the different segments of the Group’s business.  The 
Group’s profit (PBTA) for the year was £20.6 million (2014: £16.5 
million).   The  Directors  are  recommending  that  shareholders 
declare  a  final  dividend  of  3.1  pence  per  ordinary  share  in 
respect of the year ended 31 December 2015.  If approved, the 
final dividend will be paid on 3 June 2016 to shareholders on 
the Register of Members at close of business on 6 May 2016.

59

GovernanceGovernanceGovernanceEmployee Share Schemes & The SDL 
Employee Benefit Trust (the Trust)

The Company operates a number of employee share schemes.  
Under one of those schemes, ordinary shares may be held by 
trustees on behalf of employees.  Employees are not entitled 
to exercise directly any voting or other control rights in respect 
of any shares held by such trustees.  The trustees may not vote 
any shares in which they hold the beneficial interest. However, 
where the trustees are holding shares in a nominee capacity, 
the trustees must act on any voting instructions received from 
the underlying beneficial owner of such shares.

Details of issues and purchases of the Company’s shares made 
in the year to 31 December 2015 by the Trust are to be found in 
note 19 to the accounts.  Since 31 December 2015 no further 
shares have been purchased by the Trust to satisfy employee 
awards under The SDL Retention Share Plan.

All  employees,  who  meet  the  necessary  service  criteria,  in 
Canada,  the  Netherlands,  the  UK  and  the  USA  including 
Executive  Directors  may  participate  in  the  Company’s  UK  or 
International Sharesave plan.

Employees  also  hold  outstanding  share  options  under 
discretionary schemes, see note 19 to the accounts. 

All of the Company’s share plans contain provisions relating to 
a change of control.  Outstanding awards and options would 
normally vest and become exercisable on a change of control, 
subject  to  the  satisfaction  of  any  performance  conditions  at 
that time.

Share Capital and Control 

As  at  15  March  2016  the  Company’s  issued  share  capital 
comprised  a  single  class  of  ordinary  shares.    Details  of  the 
structure  of  the  Company's  capital  and  the  rights  and 
obligations  attached  to  those  shares  are  given  in  note  18  to 
the accounts.   

Each  share  carries  the  right  to  one  vote  at  general  meetings 
of the Company and ordinary rights to dividends.  The rights 
and obligations attached to the shares are more fully set out 
in  the  Articles  of  Association  of  the  Company.   There  are  no 
restrictions on the transfer of securities of the Company other 
than the following:

•  Certain restrictions may, from time to time, be imposed by 

laws and regulations (such as insider trading laws).

•  Pursuant  to  the  Listing  Rules  of  the  Financial  Conduct 
Authority,  the  Company  requires  certain  employees  to 
seek the Company’s permission to deal  in  the Company’s 
ordinary shares.  

The  Company  is  not  aware  of  any  agreements  between 
shareholders  that  may  result  in  restrictions  on  the  transfer  of 
shares and/or voting rights.  There are no shareholdings which 
carry special rights relating to control of the Company. 

The  agreements  between  the  Company  and  its  Directors 
for  compensation  for  loss  of  office  are  given  in  the  Directors 
Remuneration Report on page 42.

Substantial shareholdings

All persons with a significant holding, along with the value of that holding are given in the table below (share price at 24 February 
2016; 430.75 pence)

Holding at 
24 February  2016

% of issued  
share capital

Value of Holding  
(£000)

9,812,216

8,458,653

8,193,636

7,425,006

6,014,121

3,106,476

2,497,965

2,484,945

2,448,600

12.07

10.41

10.08

9.13

7.40

3.82

3.06

3.06

3.01

£42,266

£36,436

£35,294

£31,983

£25,906

£13,381

£10,760

£10,704

£10,547

Artemis Investment Mgt

Aberforth Partners

FIL Investment International

Schroder Investment Mgt

RGM Capital

Majedie Asset Mgt

Baillie Gifford & Co

Old Mutual Global Investors

Pyramis Global Advisors

60

Annual Report 2015GovernanceEmployment policy

Information  regarding  our  employees  and  their  involvement 
within  the  business,  including  the  Company’s  policy  towards 
discrimination  and  diversity  can  be  found  on  page  20.  Our 
employment  policies  are  developed  to  reflect  local  legal, 
cultural and employment requirements.

Health & Safety

The Chief Financial Officer has ultimate responsibility for Health 
and Safety.  Specific tasks are delegated to local office managers 
and suitably trained individuals within the organisation.

The  Group  recognises  and  accepts  its  responsibility  as  an 
employer to provide safe and healthy working conditions for 
all  its  employees.    The  Company  commits  to  maintaining  a 
safe working office environment complying with relevant local 
legislation and providing training where appropriate in matters 
of health and safety.

information  (namely,  information  needed  by  the  Company’s 
auditor  in  connection  with  the  preparation  of  their  auditor's 
report) of which the auditor is unaware.  Each Director has taken 
all the steps a director might reasonably be expected to have 
taken to be aware of relevant audit information and to establish 
that the company’s auditor is aware of that information.

Information presented in other sections  
of the Annual Report

Other  information  which  is  required  to  be  included  in  a 
Directors’ Report can be found in other sections of the Annual 
Report, as described below.  All of the information presented in 
these sections is incorporated by reference into this Directors’ 
Report and is deemed to form part of this report. 

•  Commentary on the likely future developments in the 

business of the Group is included in the Strategic Report.  

•  A description of the Group’s financial risk management 
and its exposure to risks arising are set out in note 23 to 
the accounts. 

SDL’s policy on Health & Safety includes the following:

•  Particulars of events occurring after the balance sheet 

• 

• 

• 

• 

• 

To provide information, training and supervision as is 
necessary to ensure health and safety at work;

To provide and maintain safe equipment;

To comply with statutory requirements for health, safety 
and welfare in each global office;

To maintain safe and healthy working conditions; and

To review and revise this policy as necessary at regular 
intervals.

Contractual Relationships

There are no individual contracts which are considered to be 
significant or critical to the overall business of the Group. 

Political and Charitable Donations

During the year no political donations were made.  A donation 
of £213,650 was made to The SDL Foundation. 

Internal controls

There  has  been  a  process  for  identifying,  evaluating  and 
managing significant risks throughout the year to 31 December 
2015  and  up  to  the  date  of  the  approval  of  the  financial 
statements for that year.  In respect of our financial reporting 
process  and  the  process  for  preparing  our  consolidated 
accounts, management monitors the processes underpinning 
the  Group’s  financial  reporting  systems  through  regular 
reporting and review.  Data for consolidation into the Group’s 
financial  statements  are  reviewed  by  management  to  ensure 
that  they  reflect  a  true  and  fair  view  of  the  Group’s  results  in 
compliance with applicable accounting policies.

• 

• 

date are described in notes 14 and 25 to the accounts and 
discussed in the Strategic Report. 

Information concerning Directors’ contractual 
arrangements and entitlements under share based 
remuneration arrangements is given in the Directors’ 
Remuneration Report .

Information concerning the employment of disabled 
persons and the involvement of employees in the business 
is given in ‘People’. 

•  Disclosures concerning greenhouse gas emissions are 
contained in the Environment section of the Strategic 
report on page 25.

Rule  DTR  7.2.1  of  the  Disclosure  and  Transparency  Rules 
requires  the  Group’s  disclosures  on  Corporate  Governance  to 
be included in the Directors' Report - see pages 30 to 34.  The 
information in these sections is incorporated by reference into 
this Directors’ Report and is deemed to form part of this report. 

Rule  DTR  4.1.5  of  the  Disclosure  and  Transparency  Rules 
requires that the annual report of a listed company contains a 
management report containing certain prescribed information. 
This Directors’  Report, including the other sections of the Annual 
Report  incorporated  by  reference,  comprises  a  management 
report for the Group for the year ended 31 December 2015, for 
the purposes of the Disclosure and Transparency Rules.  

COMPANY NUMBER

The Company number of SDL PLC is 2675207.

By order of the Board

Disclosure of relevant audit information

So  far  as  the  Directors  who  are  in  office  at  the  time  of  the 
approval  of  this  report  are  aware,  there  is  no  relevant  audit 

Dominic Lavelle

Director

15 March 2016

61

GovernanceGovernanceGovernanceResponsibility statement of the Directors in respect of the 
annual financial report

We confirm that to the best of our knowledge:

• 

• 

the financial statements, prepared in accordance with the 
applicable set of accounting standards, give a true and fair 
view of the assets, liabilities, financial position and profit or 
loss of the company and the undertakings included in the 
consolidation taken as a whole; and

the  strategic  report 
fair  review  of  the 
includes  a 
development  and  performance  of  the  business  and  the 
position of the issuer and the undertakings included in the 
consolidation taken as a whole, together with a description 
of the principal risks and uncertainties that they face.

We  consider  the  annual  report  and  accounts,  taken  as  a 
whole, is fair, balanced and understandable and provides the 
information  necessary  for  shareholders  to  assess  the  group’s 
position and performance, business model and strategy.

Dominic Lavelle

Director

15 March 2016

Statement Of Directors’ Responsibilities 
in Respect of the Annual Report and the 
Financial Statements  

The Directors are responsible for preparing the Annual Report 
and  the  group  and  parent  company  financial  statements  in 
accordance with applicable law and regulations.  

Company  law  requires  the  Directors  to  prepare  group  and 
parent  company  financial  statements  for  each  financial 
year.    Under  that  law  they  are  required  to  prepare  the  group 
financial  statements  in  accordance  with  IFRSs  as  adopted  by 
the  EU  and  applicable  law  and  have  elected  to  prepare  the 
parent  company  financial  statements  in  accordance  with  UK 
Accounting  Standards,  including  FRS  101  Reduced  Disclosure 
Framework.  

Under  company  law  the  Directors  must  not  approve  the 
financial statements unless they are satisfied that they give a 
true and fair view of the state of affairs of the group and parent 
company and of their profit or loss for that period.  In preparing 
each of the group and parent company financial statements, 
the Directors are required to:  

• 

select suitable accounting policies and then apply them 
consistently;  

•  make judgements and estimates that are reasonable and 

prudent;  

• 

• 

for the group financial statements, state whether they 
have been prepared in accordance with IFRSs as adopted 
by the EU;  

for the parent company financial statements, state 
whether applicable UK Accounting Standards have been 
followed, subject to any material departures disclosed and 
explained in the parent company financial statements; and  

•  prepare the financial statements on the going concern 

basis unless it is inappropriate to presume that the group 
and the parent company will continue in business.  

The Directors are responsible for keeping adequate accounting 
records  that  are  sufficient  to  show  and  explain  the  parent 
company’s transactions and disclose with reasonable accuracy 
at any time the financial position of the parent company and 
enable them to ensure that its financial statements comply with 
the Companies Act 2006.  They have general responsibility for 
taking such steps as are reasonably open to them to safeguard 
the assets of the group and to prevent and detect fraud and 
other irregularities.  

Under  applicable  law  and  regulations,  the  Directors  are  also 
responsible for preparing a Strategic Report, Directors’ Report, 
Directors’  Remuneration  Report  and  Corporate  Governance 
Statement that complies with that law and those regulations.  

The  Directors  are  responsible  for  the  maintenance  and 
integrity  of  the  corporate  and  financial  information  included 
on  the  company’s  website.    Legislation  in  the  UK  governing 
the preparation and dissemination of financial statements may 
differ from legislation in other jurisdictions. 

62

Annual Report 2015GovernanceFinancial Statements

Financial Statement

63

Financial Statements64

Annual Report 2015Financial StatementsFinancial Statements

Independent Auditor’s report  
to the members of SDL plc only

Opinions and conclusions arising from our audit

 1.   Our opinion on the financial statements 

is unmodified

We  have  audited  the  financial  statements  of  SDL  plc  for  the 
year ended 31 December 2015 set out on pages 68 to 110.  In 
our opinion:

• 

• 

• 

• 

the financial statements give a true and fair view of the state 
of  the  Group’s  and  of  the  parent  company’s  affairs  as  at  31 
December  2015  and  of  the  Group’s  loss  for  the  year  then 
ended;

• 

the  Group  financial  statements  have  been  properly 
prepared 
International  Financial 
Reporting Standards as adopted by the European Union;

in  accordance  with 

the  parent  company  financial  statements  have  been 
properly  prepared  in  accordance  with  UK  Accounting 
Standards, 
including  FRS  101  Reduced  Disclosure 
Framework; and

the financial statements have been prepared in accordance 
with the requirements of the Companies Act 2006 and, as 
regards the Group financial statements, Article 4 of the IAS 
Regulation.    

Non-Core  group  of  cash  generating  units.  Goodwill  and 
intangibles are assessed for impairment using a discounted 
cash  flow  model  for  a  value  in  use  (VIU)  model.    Due  to 
the 
in  forecasting  and 
discounting future cash flows for a VIU model, this is one of 
the key judgemental areas that our audit concentrates on.

inherent  uncertainty 

involved 

 Our response – We utilised our internal valuation specialists 
to  assist  in  this  area.  Our  procedures  included  testing  the 
budgeting procedures upon which the forecasts are based 
and the principles and integrity of the Group’s discounted 
cash flow model. We compared the input assumptions to 
externally  and  internally  derived  data  in  considering  the 
reasonableness  of  key  inputs  such  as  current  business 
trends  and  pipeline,  market  performance,  cost  inflation, 
projected  long  term  economic  growth,  and  discount 
rates.  In addition, we performed sensitivity analysis which 
considered  reasonably  possible  changes  in  assumptions 
and  their  impact  on  the  valuation  and  the  resulting 
impairment charge. Our assessment included consideration 
of the potential risk of management bias and consideration 
of the historical accuracy of the Directors’ forecasts.

2.   Our assessment of risks of material 

misstatement 

In arriving at our audit opinion above on the financial statements 
the risks of material misstatement that had the greatest effect on 
our audit were as detailed below. We have performed procedures 
over the recognition of deferred tax assets. However, following 
increased certainty over the recoverability of deferred tax assets 
as a result of changes to the Group’s structure introduced during 
the year, we have not assessed this as one of the risks that had 
the greatest effect on our audit and, therefore, it is not separately 
identified in our report this year.

Impairment of goodwill and intangibles: £163.1m 
carrying value and impairment charge £33.3m 
(2014:£202.6m carrying value)

Refer  to  page  37  (Audit  Committee  statement),  page  73 
(accounting policy) and pages 86, 89-90 (financial disclosures).

• 

The  risk  – The  carrying  value  of  goodwill  and  intangibles 
are  a  significant  part  of  the  net  assets  of  the  Group  and 
are  significant  compared  to  the  market  capitalisation  of 
the  Group.  Following  a  slower  than  anticipated  recovery 
of aspects of the Group’s trading in 2015, the Directors are 
undertaking  a  restructuring  of  the  Group’s  operations  to 
focus on its core product offerings. In light of the ongoing 
change  in  the  Group’s  operations  there  is  an  increased 
risk  and  level  of  judgement  around  impairment  in  the 
Language  Technology,  Global  Content  Technologies  and 

We  compared  the  sum  of  the  discounted  cash  flows  to  the 
Group’s  market  capitalisation  by  challenging  whether  the 
Group’s assumptions are appropriate in the light of any different 
assumptions used by investors. 

We  also  assessed  the  adequacy  of  the  Group’s  disclosures  in 
respect  of  impairment  testing  and  whether  the  disclosures 
about  the  sensitivity  of  the  outcome  of  the  impairment 
assessment to changes in key assumptions properly reflect the 
risks inherent in the key assumptions and the requirements of 
relevant accounting standards.

Technology revenue: £114.1m (2014:£113.6m)

Refer  to  page  37  (Audit  Committee  statement),  page  74 
(accounting policy) and pages 77-79 (financial disclosures).

• 

The risk – Technology revenue includes licenced software 
and  related  services  in  the  Language  Technology,  Global 
Content Technologies and Non-Core operating segments. 
Technology revenue recognition is considered a significant 
audit risk as  there is often significant judgement required 
in allocating the consideration receivable to each element 
of the contract, which requires estimation of the fair value 
of the delivered and undelivered elements of the contract. 
This  judgement  could  materially  affect  the  timing  and 
quantum of revenue and profit recognised in each period.

•  Our response –Our procedures included inspecting those 
contracts contributing the highest levels of licence revenue, 
and critically assessing:

65

Financial StatementsFinancial Statements ¶

 ¶

 ¶

 ¶

  the appropriateness of the Directors’ judgements in 
determining the fair value of each element of the 
contract by reference to standalone selling prices, 
day rates for consultancy and training, support and 
maintenance rates and renewal rates;

 the elements of the contract that have been delivered 
by obtaining proof of delivery for all delivered elements;

 the significance of undelivered elements, such as 
professional services outstanding or upgrades or future 
changes to products, to determine the potential impact 
on revenue recognition; and

 the appropriateness and consistent application of the 
Group’s accounting policies.

We  assessed  the  collection  of  receivables  for  any  potential 
impact on revenue recognition at the date of delivery, or date 
of  initial  recognition  of  revenue  if  later,  challenging  whether 
non-payment  indicated  that  either  obligations  had  not  been 
fulfilled.  We  did  this  by  checking  whether  cash  had  been 
received  after  the  year  end  in  respect  of  amounts  owed  to 
the Group at the year end, or, where amounts remain unpaid, 
we assessed the specific customer circumstances and related 
contractual terms. 

3.   Our application of materiality and an 
overview of the scope of our audit

Materiality for the Group financial statements as a whole was 
set  at  £750,000  (2014:  £750,000),  determined  with  reference 
to  a  benchmark  of  Group  loss  before  taxation  normalised 
to  exclude  one-off  items  disclosed  in  note  4  of  the  Annual 
Report (a normalised profit of £13.9m), of which it represents 
approximately  5%  (2014:  approximately  6%  of  Group  profit 
before tax normalised to exclude one-off items and averaged 
over  the  last  three  years  to  reduce  the  effect  of  volatility,  of 
£12.3m).  In  2015  it  was  not  considered  necessary  to  use  an 
average  profit  measure  over  a  number  of  years  as  profits 
excluding one-off items are now less volatile year on year.

We  reported  to  the  Audit  Committee  all  corrected  and 
uncorrected 
identified  misstatements  exceeding  £40,000 
(2014: £40,000), in addition to other identified misstatements 
that warranted reporting on qualitative grounds.

Of  the  Group’s  76  (2014:  88)  reporting  components,  we 
subjected  9  (2014:  9)  to  audits  for  group  reporting  purposes 
and 9 (2014: 7) to specified risk-focused audit procedures. The 
latter  were  not  individually  significant  enough  to  require  an 
audit  for  group  reporting  purposes,  but  did  present  specific 
individual risks that needed to be addressed.

The components within the scope of our work accounted for 
the following percentages of the Group’s results: 

Number of 
Components

Group 
Revenue

Group Loss 
before Tax (1)

Group Total 
Assets

Full-scope 
Audit

Specified 
Risk-focused 
procedures(2) 

Total (2015)

Total (2014)

9

9

18

16

61%

26%

87%

79%

68%

9%

77%

67%

79%

12%

91%

90%

(1)   This is the total profits and losses as a percentage of the total profits 

and losses that made up Group loss before tax

(2)   Procedures were focused on key areas including revenue, payroll 

costs, trade receivables, cash, accruals and provisions as applicable 
for each reporting component.

The remaining 13% of total Group revenue, 23% of Group loss 
before tax and 9% of total Group assets is represented by 58 
reporting components, none of which individually represented 
more  than  4%  of  total  Group  revenue,  Group  loss  before  tax 
or  total  Group  assets.    For  these  components,  we  performed 
analysis  at  an  aggregated  group  level  to  re-examine  our 
assessment  that  there  were  no  significant  risks  of  material 
misstatement within these.

The  Group  team  instructed  component  auditors  as  to  the 
significant  areas  to  be  covered,  including  the  relevant  risks 
detailed  above  and  the  information  to  be  reported  back. 
The  Group  team  approved  the  component  materialities, 
which  ranged  from  £100,000  to  £600,000  (2014:  £100,000  to 
£600,000), having regard to the mix of size and risk profile of 
the Group across the components. The work on 14 of the 18 
components (6 audits and 8 specified procedures) (2014: 12 of 
the  16  components)  was  performed  by  component  auditors 
and the rest by the Group team. The Group team performed 
procedures  on  items  excluded  from  normalised  group  loss 
before tax.

The Group audit team visited ten components in the USA, UK 
and Holland (2014: seven components in the UK and the USA). 
Telephone  conference  meetings  were  also  held  with  these 
component  auditors  and  all  others  that  were  not  physically 
visited.  At  these  visits  and  meetings,  the  Group  audit  team 
reviewed the audit files and the findings reported to the Group 
audit team were discussed in more detail, and any further work 
required by the Group audit team was then performed by the 
component auditor.

4.   Our opinion on other matters 

prescribed by the Companies Act 2006 
is unmodified

In our opinion:

• 

the  part  of  the  Directors’  Remuneration  report  to  be 

66

Annual Report 2015Financial StatementsUnder the Listing Rules we are required to review:

• 

• 

the Directors’ statements, set out on page 59, in relation to 
going concern and longer-term viability; and

the part of the Corporate Governance Statement on pages 
31  to  34  relating  to  the  company’s  compliance  with  the 
eleven  provisions  of  the  2014  UK  Corporate  Governance 
Code specified for our review.

We  have  nothing  to  report 
responsibilities.

in  respect  of  the  above 

Scope and responsibilities

As  explained  more  fully  in  the  Directors’  Responsibilities 
Statement  set  out  on  page  62,  the  Directors  are  responsible 
for  the  preparation  of  the  financial  statements  and  for  being 
satisfied  that  they  give  a  true  and  fair  view.  A  description  of 
the  scope  of  an  audit  of  financial  statements  is  provided  on 
the  Financial  Reporting  Council’s  website  at  www.frc.org.uk/
auditscopeukprivate . This report is made solely to the company’s 
members as a body and is subject to important explanations 
and  disclaimers  regarding  our  responsibilities,  published  on 
our  website  at  www.kpmg.com/uk/auditscopeukco2014a, 
which are incorporated into this report as if set out in full and 
should be read to provide an understanding of the purpose of 
this report, the work we have undertaken and the basis of our 
opinions.

Simon Haydn-Jones (Senior Statutory Auditor)

for and on behalf of KPMG LLP, Statutory Auditor

Chartered Accountants

15 Canada Square

London 

E14 5GL

15 March 2016

audited has been properly prepared in accordance with the 
Companies Act 2006; and

• 

the  information  given  in  the  Strategic  Report  and  the 
Directors’ report for the financial year for which the financial 
statements  are  prepared  is  consistent  with  the  financial 
statements. 

5.   We have nothing to report on the 
disclosures of principal risks   

Based  on  the  knowledge  we  acquired  during  our  audit,  we 
have nothing material to add or draw attention to in relation to:

• 

• 

the  Directors’ Viability  Statement  on  page  15,  concerning 
the principal risks, their management, and, based on that, 
the Directors’ assessment and expectations of the Group’s 
continuing in operation over the three years to December 
2018; or

the  disclosures  in  note  2  of  the  financial  statements 
concerning  the  use  of  the  going  concern  basis  of 
accounting.

6.   We have nothing to report in respect of 
the matters on which we are required 
to report by exception   

Under ISAs (UK and Ireland) we are required to report to you 
if, based on the knowledge we acquired during our audit, we 
have  identified  other  information  in  the  annual  report  that 
contains a material inconsistency with either that knowledge 
or the financial statements, a material misstatement of fact, or 
that is otherwise misleading.

In particular, we are required to report to you if:

•  we  have  identified  material  inconsistencies  between  the 
knowledge we acquired during our audit and the Directors’ 
statement  that  they  consider  that  the  annual  report  and 
financial statements taken as a whole is fair, balanced and 
understandable  and  provides  the  information  necessary 
for  shareholders  to  assess  the  Group’s  position  and 
performance, business model and strategy; or

• 

the Audit Committee report does not appropriately address 
matters communicated by us to the Audit Committee.

Under  the  Companies  Act  2006  we  are  required  to  report  to 
you if, in our opinion:

• 

• 

• 

adequate  accounting  records  have  not  been  kept  by  the 
parent company, or returns adequate for our audit have not 
been received from branches not visited by us; or

the  parent  company  financial  statements  and  the  part  of 
the  Directors’  Remuneration  report  to  be  audited  are  not 
in agreement with the accounting records and returns; or

certain disclosures of Directors’ remuneration specified by 
law are not made; or

•  we have not received all the information and explanations 

we require for our audit.

67

Financial StatementsFinancial StatementsFinancial StatementsConsolidated Income Statement

for the year ended 31 December 2015

Notes

 3

 4

 4

 4

 4

 4

 4

 4

 4

 5

7

7

2015
£m

 50.5

 216.4

2014
£m

 50.6

 209.8

 266.9

 260.4

 (116.9)

 (112.9)

  150.0

 147.5

  (175.1)

  (137.8)

 (25.1)

 9.7

               20.7 

          (6.7)

               (39.1)

               (25.1)

–

 16.8

    (7.1)

 –

 9.7

 0.1

 (0.1)

 (0.4)

 (25.2)

 9.4

 20.6

(6.7)

 (39.1)

 (25.2)

 16.5

    (7.1)

–

 9.4

 (5.5)

 (2.8)

  (30.7)

  6.6

 (37.93)

 (37.93)

 8.03

 7.97

 Sale of goods

 Rendering of services

 Revenue

 Cost of sales

 Gross profit

 Administrative expenses

 Operating loss/(profit)

Operating profit before tax, amortisation and one-off costs

 Amortisation of intangible assets

 One-off items

 Operating loss/(profit)

 Finance income

 Finance cost

(Loss)/profit before tax

 Profit before tax, amortisation and one-off costs

 Amortisation of intangible assets

 One-off items

(Loss)/profit before tax

 Tax expense

(Loss)/profit for the year attributable to equity holders  
of the parent

Earnings per ordinary share – basic (pence)

Earnings per ordinary share – diluted (pence)

Adjusted earnings per ordinary share (basic and diluted) are shown in note 7.

68

Annual Report 2015Financial Statements 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
  
  
 
Consolidated Statement  
of Comprehensive Income

for the year ended 31 December 2015

Loss/(profit) for the period

Currency translation differences on foreign operations

Notes

2015
£m

2014
£m

(30.7)

  6.6

 (6.3)

 (5.3)

Currency translation differences on foreign currency quasi equity loans to foreign subsidiaries

2.5

 4.1

Income tax charge on currency translation differences on foreign currency  
quasi equity loans to foreign subsidiaries

 5

 (0.7)

 (1.1)

 Other comprehensive income

 Total comprehensive income

 (4.5)

 (2.3)

 (35.2)

 4.3

All the total comprehensive income is attributable to equity holders of the parent Company. Currency translation differences on 
foreign operation including quasi equity loans and their related tax impacts may all be reclassified to the Income Statement upon 
disposal of that operation.

69

Financial StatementsFinancial StatementsFinancial Statements 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Consolidated Statement  
of Financial Position

at 31 December 2015

Assets

Non current assets

Property, plant and equipment

Intangible assets

Deferred tax asset

Rent deposits

Current assets

Trade and other receivables

 Corporation tax

Cash and cash equivalents

Total assets

Current liabilities

Trade and other payables

Loans and overdraft

Current tax liabilities

Provisions

Non current liabilities

Other payables

 Loans and overdraft

Deferred tax liability

Provisions

Total liabilities

Net assets

Equity

Share capital

Share premium account

Retained earnings

Foreign exchange differences 

Total equity

Approved by the Board of directors on 15 March 2016

D Clayton 
Director

70

D Lavelle 
Director

Notes

 8

 9

 5

 12

 13

 14

 16

 17

 15

 16

 5

 17

 18

2015
£m

 6.3

 163.1

 6.0

 1.6

 177.0

 73.4

 2.8

 17.2

 93.4

2014
£m

 7.4

 202.6

 5.3

 1.7

 217.0

 69.4

 2.3

 22.1

 93.8

 270.4

 310.8

 (81.7)

 -

 (9.4)

 (2.9)

 (84.0)

 (9.0)

 (6.7)

 (2.8)

 (94.0)

 (102.5)

 (1.4)

 (4.6)

 (3.1)

 (0.4)

 (9.5)

 (1.3)

 -

 (4.4)

 (0.5)

 (6.2)

 (103.5)

 (108.7)

        166.9

 202.1

 0.8

 98.5

 59.6

 8.0

 0.8

 97.9

 90.9

 12.5

 166.9

 202.1

Annual Report 2015Financial Statements 
 
 
 
 
 
  
 
 
 
Consolidated Statement  
of Changes in Equity

for the year ended 31 December 2015

At 1 January 2014

Profit for the period

Other comprehensive income

Total comprehensive income

Arising on share issues*

Share based payments*

 At 31 December 2014

At 1 January 2015

Loss for the period

Other comprehensive income

Total comprehensive income

Deferred income taxation on share based 
payments* (Note 5)

Arising on share issues*

Dividend paid*

Share based payments*

 At 31 December 2015

 Share
 Capital

£m

 0.8

 –

 –

 –

 –

 –

 0.8

 Share
 Capital

£m

 0.8

 –

 –

 –

 –

 –

 –

 –

 0.8

 Share
 Premium
 Account
£m

 97.4

 –

 –

 –

 0.5

 –

 97.9

 Share
 Premium
 Account
£m

 97.9

 –

 –

 –

 –

 0.6

 –

 –

 98.5

Retained 
Earnings

£m

 83.5

 6.6

 –

 6.6

 –

 0.8

 90.9

Retained 
Earnings

£m

 90.9

 (30.7)

 –

 (30.7)

 0.1

 –

 (2.0)

 1.3

 59.6

 Foreign 
Exchange 
Differences
£m

 14.8

 –

 (2.3)

 (2.3)

 –

 –

 12.5

 Foreign 
Exchange 
Differences
£m

 12.5

 –

 (4.5)

 (4.5)

 –

 –

 –

 –

 8.0

*  These amounts relate to transactions with owners of the Company recognised directly in equity.

The amounts above are all attributable to equity holders of the parent company

 Total

£m

 196.5

 6.6

 (2.3)

 4.3

 0.5

 0.8

 202.1

 Total

£m

 202.1

 (30.7)

 (4.5)

 (35.2)

 0.1

 0.6

 (2.0)

 1.3

 166.9

71

Financial StatementsFinancial StatementsFinancial StatementsConsolidated Statement  
of Cash Flows

at 31 December 2015

(Loss)/profit before tax

 Depreciation of property, plant and equipment

 Amortisation of intangible assets

 Impairment losses on intangible assets

 Finance income

 Finance costs

 Share based payments

 Increase in trade and other receivables

 (Decrease) / increase in trade and other payables

 Foreign exchange gains

Cash generated from operations

Income tax paid

Net cash flows from operating activities

Cash flows from investing activities

 Payments to acquire property, plant & equipment

 Receipts from sale of property, plant & equipment

 Payments to acquire intellectual property and subsidiaries

 Interest received

Net cash flows from investing activities

Cash flows from financing activities

 Net proceeds from issue of ordinary share capital

 Proceeds from borrowings

 Repayment of borrowings

 Dividends paid

 Repayment of capital leases

 Interest paid

 Net cash flows from financing activities

(Decrease)/increase in cash and cash equivalents 

Movement in cash and cash equivalents

 Cash and cash equivalents at the start of year

 (Decrease)/increase in cash and cash equivalents

 Effect of exchange rates on cash and cash equivalents

 Cash and cash equivalents at end of year

72

Notes

 8

 9

20

2015
£m

 (25.2)

 3.6

 6.7

 33.3

 -

 0.1

 1.3

 (3.9)

 (1.4)

    (2.5)                  

 12.0

 (5.8)

 6.2

 (2.7)

 0.1

 (0.3)

 -

 (2.9)

 0.2

              4.6

 (9.0)

 (2.0)

 (0.4)

 (0.1)

 (6.7)

 (3.4)

 22.1

 (3.4)

 (1.5)

 17.2

2014
£m

 9.4

 4.7

 7.1

 -

 (0.1)

 0.4

 0.8

 (2.0)

 3.6

 (1.7)

 22.2

 (3.9)

 18.3

 (2.4)

 -

 (0.3)

 0.1

 (2.6)

 0.4

 -

 (11.0)

 -

 (0.3)

 (0.4)

 (11.3)

 4.4

 18.2

 4.4

 (0.5)

 22.1

Annual Report 2015Financial Statements 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Notes to the Accounts

for the year ended 31 December 2015

1 Corporate information

The consolidated financial statements of SDL plc (the ‘Group’) 
for  the  year  ended  31  December  2015  were  authorised  for 
issue  in  accordance  with  a  resolution  of  the  directors  on  15 
March 2016. SDL plc is a public limited company incorporated 
and  domiciled  in  England  whose  shares  are  publicly  traded 
on  the  London  Stock  Exchange.  The  consolidated  financial 
statements of SDL plc and its subsidiaries have been prepared 
in accordance with International Financial Reporting Standards 
(as adopted by the European Union).

The principal activities of the Group are described in Note 3.

2 Accounting policies

Basis of accounting

The  consolidated  financial  statements  of  SDL  plc  and 
its  subsidiaries  have  been  prepared 
in  accordance  with 
International  Financial  Reporting  Standards  as  adopted  by 
the EU as relevant to the financial statements of SDL plc. The 
Company has elected to prepare its parent company financial 
statements in accordance with FRS 101 and these are presented 
on  pages  139  to  153.  The  consolidated  financial  statements 
are  prepared  on  a  historical  cost  basis,  except  for  derivative 
financial instruments that have been measured at fair value.

The  consolidated  financial  statements  are  presented  in  UK 
sterling  and  all  values  are  rounded  to  the  nearest  hundred 
thousand except where otherwise indicated. 

Going Concern

In line with UK Corporate Governance Code requirements the 
Directors have made enquiries concerning the potential of the 
business  to  continue  as  a  going  concern.  Enquiries  included 
a review of performance in 2015, 2016 annual plans, a review 
of  working  capital  including  the  liquidity  position,  financial 
covenant  compliance  and  a  review  of  current  cash  levels.  As 
a  result,  the  Directors  have  a  reasonable  expectation  that  the 
group  has  adequate  resources  to  continue  in  operational 
existence for the foreseeable future. Given this expectation, they 
have continued to adopt the going concern basis in preparing 
the financial statements.

Changes in accounting policy

The  accounting  policies  adopted  are  consistent  with  those 
of the previous financial year.  During the year, the Group has 
adopted the following new and revised standards:

• 

• 

Annual Improvements to IFRSs – 2010-2012 Cycle. 

Annual Improvements to IFRSs – 2011-2013 Cycle.

The  adoption  of  these  standards  has  had  no  impact  on  the 
Group’s results and balance sheets in the current or prior years.

Basis of preparation of consolidated  
financial statements

The consolidated financial statements include the results of the 
Company and all its subsidiaries for the full year or, in the case of 
acquisitions,  from  the  date  control  is  transferred  to  the  Group. 
Subsidiaries  are  entities  controlled  by  the  Group.  The  Group 
controls an entity when it is exposed to, or has rights to, variable 
returns from its involvement with the entity and has the ability to 
affect those returns through its power over the entity.

Business combinations

The  Group  has  elected  not  to  apply  IFRS  3  retrospectively  to 
business  combinations  that  took  place  before  the  date  of  1 
January  2004.  As  a  result,  goodwill  recognised  as  an  asset  at 
31  December  2003  is  recorded  at  its  carrying  amount  and  is 
not amortised. The purchase method of accounting is used to 
account  for  the  acquisition  of  subsidiaries  by  the  Group.  The 
cost of an acquisition is measured as the fair value of the assets, 
equity instruments issued and liabilities incurred or assumed at 
the date of exchange. Identifiable assets and liabilities acquired 
and  contingent  liabilities  assumed  in  a  business  combination 
are  measured  initially  at  their  fair  values  at  the  acquisition 
date, irrespective of the extent of any non-controlling interest. 
The excess of the cost of acquisition over the fair value of the 
Group’s share of the identifiable net assets acquired is recorded 
as goodwill. Transaction costs are expensed as incurred. If the 
cost  of  acquisition  is  less  than  the  fair  value  of  the  net  assets 
of the subsidiary acquired, the difference is recognised directly 
in  the  income  statement.  If  the  business  combination  allows 
for  a  provision  of  deferred  or  contingent  consideration,  this 
will be provided in the accounts at the fair value. Any changes 
to  the  fair  value  of  deferred  or  contingent  consideration  are 
recognised in profit or loss. If the business combination allows 
for deferred compensation this will be recognised in the income 
statement over the service period.

Intangible assets: Goodwill 

Following initial recognition, goodwill is measured at cost less 
any accumulated impairment losses. Goodwill is reviewed for 
impairment annually or more frequently if events or changes 
in  circumstances  indicate  that  the  carrying  value  may  be 
impaired. As at the acquisition date, any goodwill acquired is 
allocated to each of the cash generating units (CGUs) expected 
to benefit from the combination’s synergies. 

A CGU is the smallest identifiable group of assets that generate 
cash inflows that are largely independent of the cash inflows 
from other assets. For the purpose of impairment testing, CGUs, 
to which goodwill has been allocated, are aggregated so that 
the level at which impairment is tested reflects the lowest level 
at which goodwill is monitored for internal reporting purposes. 
This is usually the relevant operating segment within the Group.

Impairment 
is  determined  by  assessing  the  recoverable 
amount of the CGU or group of CGUs, to which the goodwill 
relates.  Where the recoverable amount of the CGU or group 
of CGUs is less than the carrying amount, an impairment loss 
is recognised. 

73

Financial StatementsFinancial StatementsFinancial StatementsGoodwill  arising  on  acquisitions  pre  1  January  2004  was 
capitalised and amortised over its useful economic life, which 
was presumed to be 8 years. Any goodwill remaining on the 
balance sheet at 1 January 2004 is not amortised after 1 January 
2004, but is also subject to annual impairment reviews.

Intangible assets: Other

Intangible assets acquired separately are capitalised at cost and 
from a business acquisition are capitalised at fair value as at the 
date  of  acquisition.  Following  initial  recognition,  intangible 
assets  are  held  at  cost  less  accumulated  amortisation  and 
provision for impairment. Intangible assets are amortised on a 
straight-line  basis  over  their  useful  economic  lives,  which  are 
reassessed annually together with any assessment of residual 
value.  The useful lives of these intangible assets are assessed 
over  the  expected  period  that  benefits  accrue  to  the  Group. 
Amortisation is charged as a separate line item on the income 
statement.

Customer  relationship  intangible  assets  are  amortised  on  a 
straight-line  basis  over  their  estimated  useful  life  of  between  
5 and 7 years.  Intellectual property assets are amortised on a 
straight-line basis over their estimated useful life of between 5 
and 10 years.

Intangible assets: Impairment of assets

An impairment loss is recognised for the amount by which the 
asset’s carrying amount exceeds its recoverable amount.  The 
recoverable  amount  is  the  higher  of  an  asset’s  fair  value  less 
costs to sell and its value in use, where value in use is calculated 
as  the  present  value  of  the  future  cash  flows  expected  to 
be  derived  from  the  asset.  For  the  purpose  of  assessing 
impairment, assets are grouped at the lowest levels for which 
there are separately identifiable cash flows (CGUs).

Property, plant and equipment 

Property,  plant  and  equipment  are  stated  at  historical  cost 
less depreciation and any impairment in value.   Historical cost 
includes  the  expenditure  that  is  directly  attributable  to  the 
acquisition of the assets. All other repairs and maintenance are 
charged to the income statement during the financial period in 
which they are incurred.  Depreciation is provided to write off 
the cost less the estimated residual value based on prices at the 
balance sheet date of property, plant and equipment over their 
estimated useful economic lives as follows:

Leasehold improvements  –   The lower of ten years or the  

lease term straight line

Computer equipment  – 

4-5 years straight line

Fixtures & fittings  – 

20% reducing balance

Motor vehicles  – 

20% reducing balance

Revenue

Revenue is recognised to the extent that it is probable that the 
economic benefits will flow to the Group and the revenue can 
be measured reliably. The following specific recognition criteria 
must also be met before revenue is recognised:

• 

For multiple element arrangements, revenue is allocated to 
each element based on fair value regardless of any separate 
prices stated within the contract. The portion of the revenue 
allocated  to  an  element  is  recognised  when  the  revenue 
recognition criteria for that element have been met.

•  Rendering of services

Revenue on service contracts is recognised only when their 
outcomes  can  be  foreseen  with  reasonable  certainty  and 
is  based  on  the  percentage  stage  of  completion  of  the 
contracts, calculated on the basis of costs incurred. Accrued 
and  deferred  revenue  arising  on  contracts  is  included  in 
trade receivables as accrued income and in trade and other 
payables as deferred income as appropriate.  

Support and maintenance contracts are invoiced in advance 
and normally run for periods of 12 months with automatic 
renewal  on  the  anniversary  date.  Revenue  in  respect  of 
support  and  maintenance  contracts  is  recognised  evenly 
over the contract period.

Managed  services  (hosting)  fees  are  recognised  over  the 
term of the hosting contract on a straight-line basis.

Professional  services  and  consulting  revenue,  which  is 
provided on a ‘time and expense’ basis, is recognised as the 
service is performed.

For multiple element arrangements, revenue is allocated to 
each element based on fair value regardless of any separate 
prices stated within the contract. The portion of the revenue 
allocated  to  an  element  is  recognised  when  the  revenue 
recognition criteria for that element have been met.

• 

Sale of goods

Revenue  from  the  sale  of  goods  is  recognised  when  the 
significant  risks  and  rewards  of  ownership  of  the  goods 
have passed to the buyer, usually on delivery of the goods.

Revenue on software licenses and upgrades is recognised 
on  delivery,  when  there  are  no  significant  vendor 
obligations  remaining  and  the  collection  of  the  resulting 
receivable is considered probable. In circumstances where 
a considerable future vendor obligation exists as part of a 
software  licence  and  related  services  contract,  revenue  is 
recognised  over  the  period  that  the  obligation  exists  per 
the contract.

Useful economic lives and residual values are assessed annually.

Foreign currencies

An  item  of  property,  plant  and  equipment  is  derecognised 
upon  disposal  or  when  no  future  economic  benefits  are 
expected to arise from the continued use of the asset.  Any gain 
or  loss  arising  on  derecognising  the  asset  (calculated  as  the 
difference between the net disposal proceeds and the carrying 
amount of the item) is included in the income statement in the 
year the item is derecognised.

Transactions in foreign currencies are recorded using the rate of 
exchange ruling at the date of the transaction. Monetary assets 
and liabilities denominated in foreign currencies are translated 
using the rate of exchange ruling at the balance sheet date and 
the gains or losses on translation are included in the income 
statement. The assets and liabilities of overseas subsidiaries and 
branches are translated at the closing exchange rate. Income 
statements of such undertakings are translated at the average 
rate of exchange during the year.  Gains and losses arising on 
these  translations  are  recognised  in  Other  Comprehensive 

74

Annual Report 2015Financial StatementsIncome and accumulated in a separate component of equity. 
As permitted by IFRS 1, SDL has elected to deem the cumulative 
amount  of  exchange  differences  arising  on  translation  of  the 
net investments in subsidiaries at 1 January 2004 to be nil.

Non-monetary assets and liabilities that are measured in terms 
of historical cost in a foreign currency are translated using the 
exchange rate at the date of the transaction.

Intra-company  loans  for  which  settlement  is  neither  planned 
nor likely to occur in the foreseeable future are defined as quasi-
equity loans. Currency translation differences on retranslation 
of  these  loans  at  the  balance  sheet  date  are  recognised  in 
the  Statement  of  Comprehensive  Income.    On  disposal,  the 
associated currency translation differences are reclassified from 
equity to profit and loss on disposal of the net investment in 
the subsidiary.

Hedge accounting

Where the Group uses derivative financial instruments such as 
foreign currency and interest rate contracts to hedge its risks 
associated with interest rate and foreign currency fluctuations, 
such  derivative  financial  instruments  are  stated  at  fair  value. 
The  fair  value  of  forward  exchange  contracts  is  calculated 
by  reference  to  current  forward  exchange  rates  for  contracts 
with  similar  maturity  profiles.  The  fair  value  of  interest  rate 
contracts  is  determined  by  reference  to  market  values  for 
similar instruments. Where derivatives do not qualify for hedge 
accounting,  any  gains  or  losses  arising  from  changes  in  fair 
value  are  taken  directly  to  the  profit  or  loss  account  for  the 
period.

and  payments  from  these  individual  personal  schemes.  SDL 
Global Solutions (Ireland) Limited operates a separate defined 
contribution  scheme  whose  assets  are  held  separately  from 
the  company.  The  pension  cost  charge  for  both  schemes 
represents contributions payable during the period. 

Provisions

Provisions  are  recognised  when  the  Group  has  a  present 
obligation (legal or constructive) as a result of a past event, it 
is probable that an outflow of resources embodying economic 
benefits will be required to settle the obligation and a reliable 
estimate can be made of the amount of the obligation. If the 
effect  of  the  time  value  of  money  is  material,  provisions  are 
discounted  using  a  current  pre-tax  rate  that  reflects,  where 
appropriate, the risks specific to the liability. Where discounting 
is used, the increase in the provision due to the passage of time 
is recognised as a finance cost.

Financial instruments

•  Non-derivative financial instruments

Non-derivative financial instruments comprise investments 
in equity and debt securities, trade and other receivables, 
cash and cash equivalents, loans and borrowings, and trade 
and other payables.

• 

Trade and other receivables

Trade  and  other  receivables  are  recognised  initially  at  fair 
value.  Subsequent to initial recognition they are measured 
at amortised cost using the effective interest method, less 
any impairment losses.

• 

Trade and other payables

Borrowing costs

Borrowing costs are recognised as an expense in the period in 
which they are incurred, unless they relate to capitalised assets.

Trade  and  other  payables  are  recognised  initially  at  fair 
value.  Subsequent to initial recognition they are measured 
at amortised cost using the effective interest method.

Leases

Finance leases, which transfer to the Group substantially all the 
risks and benefits incidental to ownership of the leased item, 
are capitalised at the inception of the lease at the fair value of 
the leased asset or, if lower, at the present value of the minimum 
lease  payments.    Lease  payments  are  apportioned  between 
the finance charges and reduction of the lease liability so as to 
achieve a constant rate of interest on the remaining balance of 
the liability.  Finance charges are recognised directly within the 
Income Statement.

Leases  where  the  lessor  retains  substantially  all  the  risks  and 
benefits  of  ownership  of  the  asset  are  classified  as  operating 
leases. Operating lease payments are recognised as an expense in 
the income statement on a straight-line basis over the lease term.

Incentives received from landlord

The aggregate benefit of incentives is recognised as a credit to 
the income statement over the life of the lease on a straight-
line basis.

Pension cost

The  company  contributes  to  a  group  personal  pension 
scheme  for  qualifying  employees  whereby  it  makes  defined 
contributions to independently administered personal pension 
schemes.  The company does not control any of the assets or 
have any ongoing liabilities with regard to the performance of 

•  Cash and cash equivalents

Cash and cash equivalents comprise cash balances and call 
deposits.  Bank  overdrafts  that  are  repayable  on  demand 
and form an integral part of the Group’s cash management 
are included as a component of cash and cash equivalents 
for the purpose only of the cash flow statement.

• 

Interest-bearing borrowings

Interest-bearing  borrowings  are  recognised  initially  at  fair 
value  less  attributable  transaction  costs.  Subsequent  to 
initial recognition, interest-bearing borrowings are stated at 
amortised cost using the effective interest method, less any 
impairment losses. 

Derecognition of financial assets and liabilities

A financial asset or liability is generally derecognised when the 
contract that gives rise to it is settled, sold, cancelled or expires.

Where an existing financial liability is replaced by another from 
the same lender on substantially different terms, or the terms of 
an existing liability are substantially modified, such as exchange 
or modification, it is treated as a derecognition of the original 
liability and the recognition of the new liability, such that the 
difference  in  the  respective  carrying  amounts  together  with 
any costs or fees incurred are recognised in the profit or loss. 

75

Financial StatementsFinancial StatementsFinancial StatementsTaxation

The  charge  for  current  taxation  is  based  on  the  results  for 
the  year  as  adjusted  for  items  which  are  non-assessable  or 
disallowed, based on tax rates that are enacted or substantively 
enacted at the balance sheet date. 

Deferred income tax is provided, using the liability method, on 
temporary differences at the balance sheet date between the 
tax bases of assets and liabilities and their carrying amounts for 
financial reporting purposes.

Deferred  income  tax  liabilities  are  recognised  for  all  taxable 
temporary differences except:

•  where the deferred income tax liability arises from the initial 
recognition of an asset or liability in a transaction that is not 
a business combination and, at the time of the transaction, 
affects  neither  the  accounting  profit  or  loss  nor  taxable 
profit or loss; and

• 

in respect of taxable temporary differences associated with 
investments in subsidiaries, where the timing of the reversal 
of  the  temporary  differences  can  be  controlled  and  it  is 
probable that the temporary differences will not reverse in 
the foreseeable future.

Deferred  income  tax  assets  are  recognised  for  all  deductible 
temporary differences, carry-forward of unused tax assets and 
unused tax losses, to the extent that it is probable that taxable 
profit will be available against which the deductible temporary 
differences,  and  the  carry-forward  of  unused  tax  assets  and 
unused tax losses can be utilised, except:

•  where  the  deferred  income  tax  asset  relating  to  the 
deductible  temporary  difference  arises  from  the  initial 
recognition of an asset or liability in a transaction that is not 
a business combination and, at the time of the transaction, 
affects  neither  the  accounting  profit  or  loss  nor  taxable 
profit or loss; and

• 

in respect of deductible temporary differences associated 
with  investments  in  subsidiaries,  deferred  tax  assets  are 
only  recognised  to  the  extent  that  it  is  probable  that  the 
temporary differences will reverse in the foreseeable future 
and  taxable  profit  will  be  available  against  which  the 
temporary differences can be utilised.

The carrying amount of deferred income tax assets is reviewed 
at  each  balance  sheet  date  and  reduced  to  the  extent  that 
it  is  no  longer  probable  that  sufficient  taxable  profit  will  be 
available to allow all or part of the deferred income tax asset 
to be utilised.

In the United Kingdom, the Group is entitled to a tax deduction 
for  amounts  treated  as  remuneration  on  exercise  of  certain 
employee  share  options.  As  explained  under  ‘Share  based 
payments’  below,  a  remuneration  expense  is  recorded  in  the 
consolidated income statement over the period from the grant 
date to the vesting date of the relevant options. As there is a 
temporary difference between the accounting and tax bases, 
a  deferred  tax  asset  may  be  recorded. The  deferred  tax  asset 
arising on share option awards is calculated as the estimated 
amount of tax deduction to be obtained in the future (based 
on  the  Group’s  share  price  at  the  balance  sheet  date)  pro-
rated  to  the  extent  that  the  services  of  the  employee  have 
been rendered over the vesting period. If this amount exceeds 
the  cumulative  amount  of  the  remuneration  expense  at  the 

76

statutory rate, the excess is recorded directly in equity, against 
retained  earnings.  Similarly,  current  tax  relief  in  excess  of  the 
cumulative  amount  of  the  remuneration  expense  at  the 
statutory rate is also recorded in retained earnings. 

Deferred income tax assets and liabilities are measured at the 
tax rates that are expected to apply to the year when the asset 
is realised or the liability is settled, based on tax rates (and tax 
laws) that have been enacted or substantively enacted at the 
balance sheet date.

Income  tax  relating  to  items  recognised  directly  in  equity  is 
recognised in equity and not in the income statement.

Revenues,  expenses  and  assets  are  recognised  net  of  the 
amount of VAT except:

•  where the VAT incurred on a purchase of goods and services 
is not recoverable from the taxation authority, in which case 
the VAT is recognised as part of the cost of acquisition of the 
asset or as part of the expense item as applicable; and

• 

trade receivables and payables are stated with the amount 
of VAT included.

The  net  amount  of  VAT  recoverable  from,  or  payable  to,  the 
taxation authority is included as part of receivables or payables 
in the balance sheet.

Share based payments

(including  directors)  of 

Employees 
receive 
remuneration in the form of share-based payment transactions, 
whereby employees render services in exchange for shares or 
rights over shares (‘Equity-settled transactions’).

the  Group 

Equity-settled transactions

The  cost  of  equity-settled  transactions  with  employees  is 
measured  by  reference  to  the  fair  value  at  the  date  at  which 
they  are  granted  and  is  recognised  as  an  expense  over  the 
vesting period, which ends on the date on which the relevant 
employees  become  fully  entitled  to  the  award.    Fair  value  is 
determined by using an appropriate option pricing model. In 
valuing equity-settled transactions, no account is taken of any 
vesting conditions, other than conditions linked to the price of 
the shares of the company (market conditions). The volatility in 
the models is calculated by reference to historical share price.

The cost of equity-settled transactions is recognised, together 
with  a  corresponding  increase  in  equity,  on  a  cumulative 
straight line basis over the term from the date of grant to the 
date on which the relevant employees become entitled to the 
award (‘vesting date’). The cumulative expense recognised for 
equity  settled  transactions  at  each  reporting  date  until  the 
vesting date reflects the number of awards that, in the opinion 
of the directors of the Group at that date, are expected to vest. 

No  expense  is  recognised  for  awards  that  do  not  ultimately 
vest,  except  for  awards  where  vesting  is  conditional  upon  a 
market condition, which are treated as vesting irrespective of 
whether or not the market condition is satisfied, provided that 
all other performance conditions are satisfied.

Where  the  terms  of  an  equity-settled  award  are  modified,  as 
a minimum an expense is recognised as if the terms had not 
been modified. In addition, an expense is recognised over the 
remainder of the vesting period for any increase in the fair value 

Annual Report 2015Financial Statementsof the transaction as a result of the modification, as measured 
at the date of modification.

Where  an  equity-settled  award  is  cancelled,  it  is  treated  as  if 
it  had  vested  on  the  date  of  cancellation,  and  any  expense 
not  yet  recognised  for  the  award  is  recognised  immediately. 
However, if a new award is substituted for the cancelled award, 
and designated as a replacement award on the date that it is 
granted, the cancelled and new awards are treated as if they 
were a modification of the original award, as described in the 
previous paragraph.

The Group has taken advantage of the transitional provisions of 
IFRS 2 in respect of equity-settled awards and has applied IFRS 
2 only to equity-settled awards granted after 7 November 2002 
that had not vested at 1 January 2005.

National  Insurance  on  Share  Option  Grants:  The  anticipated 
National Insurance charge on gains made by employees over 
the period from date of grant of the option to the end of the 
performance period has been provided for.

Research and development costs

Research  costs  are  expensed  as 
incurred.  Development 
expenditure  incurred  on  an  individual  project  is  capitalised 
when  its  future  recoverability  can  reasonably  be  regarded 
as  assured  and  technical  feasibility  and  commercial  viability 
can  be  demonstrated.  Where  these  criteria  are  not  met  the 
expenditure is expensed to the income statement. Following 
the  initial  capitalisation  of  the  development  expenditure  the 
cost  model  is  applied,  requiring  the  asset  to  be  carried  at 
cost  less  any  accumulated  amortisation  and  accumulated 
impairment  losses.  Any  expenditure  capitalised  is  amortised 
over  the  period  of  expected  future  sales  from  the  related 
project. The  carrying  value  of  development  costs  is  reviewed 
for  impairment  annually  when  the  asset  is  not  yet  in  use  or 
more frequently when an indicator of impairment arises during 
the reporting year indicating that the carrying value may not 
be recoverable.

Development  costs  that  are  subject  to  amortisation  are 
reviewed  for  impairment  whenever  events  or  changes  in 
circumstances indicate that the carrying amount may not be 
recoverable.

One-off items

One-off items are those items that in management judgement 
should be disclosed separately by virtue of their size, nature or 
incidence  to  provide  a  better  understanding  of  the  financial 
performance of the Group. In determining whether an event 
or transaction is one-off, management considers qualitative as 
well as quantitative factors such as frequency or predictability 
of  occurrence.    One-off  items  include  significant  costs  of 
restructuring  and  other  costs  that  are  considered  to  be  non-
recurring.

Segment reporting

Segment  results  that  those  reported  to  the  Chief  Operating 
Decision  Maker  for  the  purpose  of  making  decisions  about 
allocating resources to segments and assessing performance.  
These results include items directly attributable to a segment 
as well as those that can be allocated on a reasonable basis.

New standards and interpretations not applied

The following EU Endorsed IFRSs have been issued but have not 
been applied by the Group in these financial statements.  Their 
adoption is not expected to have a material effect on the financial 
statements unless otherwise indicated:

• 

• 

• 

IFRS 9 Financial Instruments (effective date to be confirmed). 

IFRS 14 Regulatory Deferral Accounts (effective date to be 
confirmed). 

IFRS  15  Revenue  from  Contract  with  Customers  (effective 
date to be confirmed). The Group continues to review the 
impact of this Standard.  Key implementation issues under 
review  include  the  acceleration  of  revenue  recognised 
on the licence element of term licence contracts and the 
deferral of commission payments. 

•  Accounting for Acquisitions of Interests in Joint Operations 
– Amendments to IFRS 11 (effective date to be confirmed).

•  Clarification  of  Acceptable  Methods  of  Depreciation  and 
Amortisation – Amendments to IAS 16 and IAS 38 (effective 
date to be confirmed).

•  Agriculture: Bearer Plants – Amendments to IAS 16 and IAS 

41 (effective date to be confirmed).

• 

• 

Equity  Method 
Amendments to IAS 27 (effective date to be confirmed). 

in  Separate  Financial  Statements  – 

Sale or Contribution of Assets between and Investor and its 
Associate  or  Joint Venture  –  Amendments  to  IFRS  10  and 
IAS 28 (effective date to be confirmed). 

•  Annual Improvements to IFRSs – 2012-2014 Cycle (effective 

date to be confirmed).

• 

Investment entities: Applying the Consolidation Exception 
– Amendments to IFRS 10, IFRS 12 and IAS 28 (effective date 
to be confirmed).

•  Disclosure Initiative – Amendments to IAS 1 (effective date 

to be confirmed).

Significant critical accounting judgements, estimates and 
assumptions

Judgements

the  Group’s  consolidated  financial 
The  preparation  of 
judgements, 
statements  requires  management  to  make 
estimates  and  assumptions  that  affect  the  reported  amounts 
of revenues, expenses, assets and liabilities, and the disclosure 
of  contingent  liabilities,  at  the  end  of  the  reporting  period. 
However, uncertainty about these estimates and assumptions 
could result in outcomes that require a material adjustment to 
the carrying amount of the asset or liability affected in future 
periods.

In  the  process  of  applying  the  Group’s  accounting  policies, 
management  has  made  the  following  judgements,  which  have 
the  most  significant  effect  on  the  amounts  recognised  in  the 
consolidated financial statements:

Revenue - technology revenue

Technology  revenue  includes  licenced  software  and  related 
services. Where software is sold as a perpetual licence, revenue 
is typically recognised on delivery. Support and maintenance 
and other services generally form part of the contract and the 
revenue is recognised as the services are performed. In these 

77

Financial StatementsFinancial StatementsFinancial Statementscases  often  significant  judgement  is  required  in  allocating 
the consideration receivable to each element of the contract, 
which requires estimation of the fair value of the delivered and 
undelivered  elements  of  the  contract. This  judgement  could 
materially affect the timing and quantum of revenue and profit 
recognised in each period.

Estimates and assumptions

The key assumptions and estimates concerning the future and 
other  key  sources  of  estimation  uncertainty  at  the  reporting 
date, that have significant risk of causing a material adjustment 
to the carrying amounts of assets and liabilities within the next 
financial year are discussed below:

Impairment

The  determination  of  whether  or  not  goodwill  has  been 
impaired  requires  an  estimate  to  be  made  of  the  value  in 
use of the cash generating unit or group of cash generating 
units to which goodwill has been allocated. The value in use 
calculation  includes  estimates  about  the  future  financial 
performance  of  the  cash  generating  units,  management’s 
estimates  of  discount  rates,  long-term  operating  margins 
and  long-term  growth  rates  (note  11).  If  the  results  of 
the  cash  generating  unit  in  a  future  period  are  materially 
adverse to the estimates used for the impairment testing, an 
impairment charge may be triggered.

Other estimates and assumptions 

Revenue - rendering of services

Management  makes  estimates  of  the  total  costs  that  will  be 
incurred  by  SDL  on  a  contract  by  contract  basis.  Management 
reviews the estimate of total costs on each contract on an ongoing 
basis  to  ensure  that  the  revenue  recognised  accurately  reflects 
the proportion of the work done at the balance sheet date.

Share based payments

The Group measures the cost of equity-settled transactions with 
employees by reference to the fair value of the equity instruments 
at the date at which they are granted. Estimating fair value for 
share-based  payment  transactions  requires  determining  the 
most appropriate valuation model, which is dependent on the 
terms  and  conditions  of  the  grant. This  estimate  also  requires 
determining  the  most  appropriate  inputs  to  the  valuation 
model including the expected life of the share option, volatility 
and  dividend  yield  and  making  assumptions  about  them. The 
assumptions and models used for estimating fair value for share-
based payment transactions are disclosed in Note 19.

Taxes

Uncertainties  exist  with  respect  to  the 
interpretation  of 
complex tax regulations and the amount and timing of future 
taxable income. Given the wide range of international business 
relationships  and  the  long-term  nature  and  complexity  of 
existing  contractual  agreements,  differences  arising  between 
the actual results and the assumptions made, or future changes 
to  such  assumptions,  could  necessitate  future  adjustments 
to  tax  income  and  expense  already  recorded.  Differences  of 
interpretation may arise on a wide variety of issues depending 
on the conditions prevailing in the respective Group company’s 
domicile.

Deferred  tax  assets  are  recognised  for  all  unused  tax  losses 
to  the  extent  that  it  is  probable  that  taxable  profit  will  be 
available against which the losses can be utilised. Management 
judgement  is  required  to  determine  the  amount  of  deferred 
tax assets that can be recognised, based upon the likely timing 
and the level of future taxable profits together with future tax 
planning  strategies.    Further  details  on  taxes  are  disclosed  in 
Note 5.

3 Segment information 

The  Group  operates  in  the  global  content  management  and  language  translation  industries.  For  management  purposes,  the 
Group is organised into business units based on the nature of their products and services.  Following the completion of the Group’s 
operational review, the Group has four reportable operating segments as follows: 

• 

• 

• 

• 

The Language Services segment is the provision of a translation service for customer’s multilingual content in multiple languages.

The Language Technology segment is the sale of enterprise, desktop and statistical machine translation technologies together 
with associated consultancy and services.

The Global Content Technologies segment is content management and knowledge management technologies together with 
associated consultancy services.

The Non Core Businesses segment includes the sale of campaign management, social media monitoring and marketing analytic 
and Fredhopper technologies together with associated consultancy and services.

The Chief Operating Decision Maker monitors the results of the operating segments separately for the purpose of making decisions 
about resource allocation and performance assessment prior to charges for tax, amortisation and one-offs.

Following  the  completion  of  the  Group’s  2015  operational  review,  the  Group  has  also  revisited  its  internal  recharge  allocation 
methodologies during the year to better reflect how services and costs are consumed by each segment. The impact has been to 
recognise additional internal revenue recharges of £3.8 million and to reallocate costs of £1.3 million between Language Services 
and Language Technology segments.  In accordance with IFRS8, the operating segments and internal recharges for the comparative 
period have been restated to provide consistent and meaningful information. 

78

Annual Report 2015Financial StatementsYear ended  
31 December 2015

 External 
Revenue

 Internal 
Revenue

 Total 
Revenue

Shared  
Costs

Depreciation

£m

152.8

36.7

50.9

26.5

266.9

£m

–

5.5

–

–

5.5

£m

£m

152.8

42.2

50.9

26.5

272.4

24.0

7.5

11.5

8.5

51.5

£m

1.3

1.3

0.4

0.6

3.6

Language Services

Language Technology

Global Content Technologies

Non Core Businesses

Total

Amortisation & One-off Costs

Profit before taxation

Year ended  
31 December 2014 - restated

 External 
Revenue

 Internal 
Revenue

 Total 
Revenue

Shared  
Costs

Depreciation

£m

146.8

37.4

51.4

24.8

260.4

£m

–

5.5

–

–

5.5

£m

146.8

42.9

51.4

24.8

265.9

£m

22.6

7.0

10.3

7.2

47.1

Language Services

Language Technology

Global Content Technologies

Non Core Businesses

Total

Amortisation

Profit before taxation

Shared costs represent total central costs which are allocated to segments each year.

Geographical analysis of external revenues by country of domicile is as follows:

UK

USA

Republic of Ireland

Netherlands

Belgium

Germany

Canada

Rest of World

£m

1.6

1.6

0.6

0.9

4.7

2015
£m

69.8

77.4

22.2

20.1

14.8

13.1

12.7

36.8

Segment profit/(loss) 
before taxation  
and amortisation
£m

30.4

1.3

(1.5)

(9.6)

20.6

(45.8)

                     (25.2)

Segment profit/(loss) 
before taxation  
and amortisation
£m

24.1

5.1

(1.5)

(11.2)

16.5

(7.1)

9.4

2014
£m

70.0

72.1

22.1

20.9

17.2

15.2

10.9

32.0

A Geographical analysis of external revenues by destination is provided in the Operational Review on page 16.

Geographical analysis of non-current assets excluding deferred tax is as follows:

266.9

260.4

UK

USA

Rest of World

2015
£m

67.2

55.8

48.0

171.0

2014
£m

84.6

75.3

51.8

211.7

Goodwill and intangibles recognised on consolidation are included in the country which initially acquired the business giving rise 
to the recognition of goodwill and intangibles.

79

Financial StatementsFinancial StatementsFinancial Statements4 Other revenue and expenses

Group operating profit is stated after charging/(crediting):

 Included in administrative expenses:

 Research and development expenditure

 Bad debt charge

 Depreciation of property, plant and equipment – owned assets

 Depreciation of property, plant and equipment – leased assets

 Amortisation of intangible assets

 Operating lease rentals for plant and machinery

 Operating lease rentals for land and buildings

 Net foreign exchange gains

 Share based payment charge

2015
£m

 26.9

 0.2

 3.5

 0.1

 6.7

 0.5

 6.5

 (3.8)

 1.5

2014
£m

 27.6

 0.3

 4.5

 0.2

 7.1

 0.5

 6.8

 (2.2)

 1.4

The net foreign exchange gains above arose due to movements in foreign currencies between the time of the original transaction 
and the realisation of the cash collection or spend, and the retranslation of foreign currency denominated intra-group balances.  

Research and development costs

Management  continually  review  research  and  development  expenditure  to  assess  whether  any  costs  meet  the  criteria  for 
capitalisation. There have been no costs capitalised in 2015 (2014: £nil) with the primary criteria for non capitalisation being technical 
and commercial feasibility not being achieved until very late in the development cycle for new product releases.

Auditor’s remuneration

 Audit of the Group financial statements

 Other fees to auditors:

Local statutory audits for subsidiaries

Taxation compliance services 

Other services 

 Staff costs

 Wages and salaries

 Social security costs

 Pension costs (included in administrative expenses)

 Expense of share based payments

2015
£m

 0.4

 0.1

 0.3

 0.4

2015
£m

 123.4

 15.5

 4.6

 1.5

 145.0

2014
£m

 0.3

 0.1

 0.2

 0.1

2014
£m

 120.1

 15.5

 4.3

 1.4

 141.3

The  Company  operates  a  personal  pension  scheme  for  qualifying  employees.    Other  Group  companies  contribute  to  defined 
contribution type arrangements for their qualifying members. The pension cost charge for the year represents contributions payable 
by the group to these schemes and amounted to £4.6 million (2014: £4.3 million).

The average number of employees during the year, including Executive Directors, was made up as follows:

 Administration and sales

 Production

80

2015
Number

 1,276

 2,228

 3,504

2014
Number

 1,201

 2,044

 3,245

Annual Report 2015Financial Statements 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Finance costs

 Bank loans

 Other interest paid

Finance income

 Bank interest receivable

One-off items

 Impairment charge

 Redundancy and other staff costs

 Other one-off items

2015
£m

 0.1

–

 0.1

2015
£m

 –

2015
£m

 33.3

 3.5

 2.3

 39.1

2014
£m

 0.3

 0.1

 0.4

2014
£m

 0.1

2014
£m

 –

 0.5

 (0.5)

 –

One-off items relate to a number of non recurring items that arose during the year.

Following a disappointing trading year in 2015 for the Group’s technology operating segments and the completion of the 2015 
operational  review,  the  group  has  determined  that  the  carrying  value  of  goodwill  in  its  Language  Technology  and  Non-Core 
Businesses operating segments were impaired by £33.3 million. Further details are provided in Note 11. 

The Group began to right size technology sales, marketing and operations teams in the second half of 2015. These actions, together 
with the departure of the Group CEO, to non recurring redundancy costs of £3.0m being incurred in the year. The Group also sought 
to retain key employees during this time of change within the organisation and hence retention packages have been provided to 
these individuals. The 2015 charge represents the time based cost of these incentive packages in 2015 and further costs will be 
incurred in 2016 as the service periods elapse. The total charge for non recurring retention and staff related costs in the year was 
£0.5 million.

Other  one-off  items  relate  to  professional  and  related  fees  associated  with  the  Group’s  operational  review  and  corporate 
consolidations carried out in 2015 and non recurring indirect tax liabilities. The Group has grown through acquisition over the past 
10 years and inherited a complex and costly group structure. Major corporate consolidation projects have occurred in the United 
States, the Netherlands, Belgium and France in 2015. Some further costs will be incurred in 2016 associated with the completion of 
this simplification exercise.  

 These have been separately disclosed in the income statement to provide a better guide to underlying business performance.

81

Financial StatementsFinancial StatementsFinancial Statements 
 
5 Income tax

(a) Income tax on profit:

Consolidated income statement

 Current taxation

 UK Income tax charge

 Current tax on income for the period

 Adjustments in respect of prior periods

 Foreign tax

 Current tax on income for the period

 Adjustments in respect of prior periods

 Total current taxation

 Deferred income taxation

 Origination and reversal of temporary differences

 Total deferred income tax

 Tax expense (see (b) below)

Consolidated statement of other comprehensive income

 Current taxation

 UK Income tax charge

  Income tax charge on currency translation differences  
on foreign currency quasi equity loans to foreign subsidiaries

 Total current taxation

 2015
£m

 2014
£m

 1.9

 0.1

 2.0

 4.9

 0.5

 5.4

 7.4

 (1.9)

 (1.9)

 0.9

 0.1

 1.0

 5.0

 (0.1)

 4.9

 5.9

 (3.1)

 (3.1)

 5.5

 2.8

 2015
£m

 2014
£m

 0.7

 0.7

 1.1

 1.1

A tax credit in respect of share based compensation for current taxation of £nil (2014: £nil) has been recognised in the statement of 
changes in equity in the year.

A tax debit in respect of share based compensation for deferred taxation of £0.1 million (2014: £nil) has been recognised in the 
statement of changes in equity in the year.  

(b) Factors affecting tax charge:

The tax assessed on the profit on ordinary activities for the year is higher than the standard rate of income tax in the UK of 20.3% 
(2014: 21.5%). The differences are reconciled below:

Consolidated income statement

(Loss) / profit  on ordinary activities before tax

(Loss) / profit on ordinary activities at standard rate of tax in the UK 20.3% (2014: 21.5%)

Expenses not deductible for tax purposes

Impairment of goodwill

Adjustments in respect of previous years

Depreciation in excess of capital allowances

Recognition of tax losses brought forward previously not recognised

Utilisation of tax losses brought forward previously not recognised

Current tax losses not available for offset

Effect of overseas tax rates

Other

Tax expense (see (a) above)

82

 2015
£m

(25.2)

 2014
£m

9.4

(5.1)

1.2

6.7

0.6

0.3

(1.7)

(0.6)

2.6

 0.6

 0.9

5.5

2.0

0.4

–

0.1

–

(2.1)

(1.6)

3.6

 0.3

 0.1

2.8

Annual Report 2015Financial Statements 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
(c) Factors that may affect future tax charges:

The Group may claim a Schedule 23 tax credit in respect of certain share based compensation benefits. Due to the requirements of 
IAS 12, in conjunction with IFRS 2, the amount of benefit that can be recognised in the income statement has been restricted in the 
current year and may also be restricted in future periods. Any surplus tax credit will be recorded in equity.

There are temporary differences which arise in relation to unremitted earnings of overseas subsidiaries. Since the Group is able to 
control dividend distributions from these companies it is unlikely that further UK tax on repatriation of these earnings will be payable 
in the foreseeable future. Consequently no deferred tax liability has been provided.

Reductions in the UK corporation tax rate from 23% to 21% (effective from 1 April 2014) and 20% (effective from 1 April 2015) were 
substantively enacted on 2 July 2013. Further reductions to 19% (effective from 1 April 2017) and to 18% (effective 1 April 2020) were 
substantively enacted on 26 October 2015. This will reduce the company’s future current tax charge accordingly.

(d) Deferred income tax:

The amounts recognised and unrecognised for deferred income tax are set out below:

Depreciation in advance of capital allowances

Other short-term temporary differences

Tax losses

 Net deferred income tax asset

 Recognised
2015
£m

 Unrecognised
2015
£m

Recognised
2014
£m

 Unrecognised
2014
£m

 0.5

 (2.3)

 4.7

 2.9

 –

 –

35.6

35.6

 0.5

 (3.5)

 3.9

 0.9

 –

 –

34.4

34.4

The Group has unrecognised tax losses in net terms of £35.6 million (2014: £34.4 million) that may be available for use by offset 
against future taxable profits in the companies in which the losses arose. 

Deferred tax assets have not been recognised in companies where either there is a history of losses or the Group cannot foresee 
profitability with sufficient certainty. The unrecognised losses disclosed above excluded the Group’s estimate of time barred losses 
which will not be available for offset in future years.

Included within other short term temporary differences are deferred tax assets in respect of potential Schedule 23 tax benefits of 
£0.4 million (2014: £0.5 million) and a deferred tax liability in respect of the amortisation of certain intangible assets acquired of £2.9 
million (2014: £4.2 million).

The Group has recognised deferred tax assets on losses of £4.7 million (2014: £3.9 million). The amounts recognised are based on the 
historical profitability and the forecast future taxable profits of the relevant entities.

At 31 December 2015, the net deferred income tax position is represented by a deferred income tax asset of £6.0 million (2014: £5.3 
million) and a deferred income tax liability of £3.1 million (2014: £4.4 million).

(e)  Reconciliation of movement on deferred tax liability:

At 1 January

 Retranslation of opening balances

 Deferred tax liability arising on intangible assets acquired

Reversal of temporary differences arising on the amortisation of intangibles

Other temporary differences arising in the period

Deferred tax liability at 31 December

 2015
£m

 4.4

 –

 –

 (1.3)

 –

 3.1

 2014
£m

 6.0

 –

 –

 (1.4)

 (0.2)

 4.4

83

Financial StatementsFinancial StatementsFinancial Statements 
 
 
 
(f )  Reconciliation of movement on deferred tax asset:

At 1 January

Retranslation of opening balances

Temporary differences arising in the period

Deferred income tax asset arising on share based payments recorded in statement of changes in equity

Other temporary differences arising in the period

Deferred tax asset at 31 December

 2015
£m

 5.3

 0.1

 0.7

 (0.1)

 –

6.0

 2014
£m

 3.7

 0.1

 1.5

 –

 –

 5.3

Reductions in the UK corporation tax rate from 23% to 21% (effective from 1 April 2014) and to 20% (effective 1 April 2015) were 
substantively enacted on 2 July 2013. Further reductions to 19% (effective from 1 April 2017) and to 18% (effective from 1 April 
2020) were substantively enacted on 26 October 2015. This will reduce the company’s future current tax charge accordingly. The 
deferred tax asset of £6.0 million (2014: £5.3 million) and liability of £3.1 million at 31 December 2015 (2014: £4.4 million) have been 
calculated based on the rate of 20% which was substantively enacted at the balance sheet date or local tax rates as applicable in 
overseas territories.

6 Dividends

Amounts recognised as distributions to equity holders in the year:

Final dividend for the year ended 31 December 2014 was 2.5 pence per share.  
(Year ended 31 December 2013: Nil)

2015
£m

2.0

2014
£m

–

A final dividend for the year ended 31 December 2015 of 3.1 pence per share will be proposed at the Annual General Meeting and 
has not been included as a liability in the financial statements.

7 Earnings per share

The calculation of basic earnings per ordinary share is based on a loss after tax of £30.7 million (2014: profit of £6.6 million) and 
81,101,706 (2014: 80,758,772) ordinary shares, being the weighted average number of ordinary shares in issue during the period.  

The diluted earnings per ordinary share is calculated by including in the weighted average number of shares the dilutive effect of 
potential ordinary shares related to committed share options as described in note 19.  For 2015, the diluted ordinary shares were 
based on 81,823,905 ordinary shares that included 722,199 potential ordinary shares.

The following reflects the income and share data used in the calculation of adjusted earnings per share computations before one-off items:

(Loss) / profit for the year

One-off costs (including impairment loss)

Amortisation of intangible fixed assets

Less: tax benefit associated with the amortisation of intangible fixed assets

Tax benefit associated with one-off items

Adjusted profit for the year

 2015
£m

 (30.7)

 39.1

 6.7

 (1.3)

 (0.6)

 13.2

 2014
£m

 6.6

 –

 7.1

 (1.4)

 –

 12.3

Adjusted earnings per share is shown as the Directors believe that earnings before amortisation and one-off items is reflective of the 
underlying performance of the business.

84

Annual Report 2015Financial StatementsWeighted average number of ordinary shares for basic earnings per share

Effect of dilution resulting from share options

Weighted average number of ordinary shares adjusted for the effect of dilution

Adjusted earnings per ordinary share – basic (pence)

Adjusted earnings per ordinary share – diluted (pence)

 2015
No.

 2014
No.

 81,101,706

 80,758,772

 722,199

 614,620

 81,823,905

 81,373,392

 2015

 16.13

 15.99

 2014

 15.10

 14.98

There have been no material transactions involving ordinary shares or potential ordinary shares between the reporting date and the 
date of completion of the financial statements.

8 Property, plant and equipment

Cost:

 At 1 January 2014

 Additions

 Disposals

 Currency adjustment

 At 1 January 2015

 Additions

 Disposals

 Currency adjustment

 At 31 December 2015

Accumulated depreciation:

At 1 January 2014

Provided during the year

Disposals

Currency adjustment

At 1 January 2015

Provided during the year

Disposals

Currency adjustment

At 31 December 2015

Net book value

At 31 December 2015

At 1 January 2015

 Leasehold 
Improvements
£m

 Computer 
Equipment
£m

 Fixtures  
& Fittings
£m

 Motor  
Vehicles
£m

 1.9

 0.2

 (0.1)

 –

 2.0

 0.4

 –

 0.3

 2.7

 22.3

 1.7

 (2.5)

 0.5

 22.0

 2.1

 (1.2)

 3.6

 26.5

 3.6

 0.5

 (0.2)

 (0.1)

 3.8

 0.2

 (0.3)

 (0.5)

 3.2

 0.1

 –

 (0.1)

 –

 –

 –

 –

 –

 –

 Leasehold 
Improvements
£m

 Computer 
Equipment
£m

 Fixtures  
& Fittings
£m

 Motor  
Vehicles
£m

(1.2)

(0.2)

0.1

–

(1.3)

(0.2)

–

(0.4)

(1.9)

0.8

0.7

(14.3)

(4.2)

2.5

(0.4)

(16.4)

(3.2)

              1.1

(3.6)

(22.1)

4.4

5.6

(2.7)

(0.3)

0.2

0.1

(2.7)

(0.2)

0.3

0.5

(2.1)

1.1

1.1

(0.1)

–

0.1

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

 Total

£m

 27.9

 2.4

 (2.9)

 0.4

 27.8

 2.7

 (1.5)

 3.4

 32.4

 Total

£m

(18.3)

(4.7)

2.9

(0.3)

(20.4)

(3.6)

       1.4

(3.5)

(26.1)

6.3

7.4

Included in property, plant and equipment are assets held under finance lease of £0.1 million at 31 December 2015 (2014: £0.1 million). 

85

Financial StatementsFinancial StatementsFinancial Statements9 Intangible assets

Cost

At 1 January 2014

Currency adjustment

At 1 January 2015

Acquisitions

Currency adjustment

At 31 December 2015

Amortisation and impairment

At 1 January 2014

Provided during the year

Currency adjustment

At 1 January 2015

Provided during the year

Impairment loss

Currency adjustment

At 31 December 2015

Net book value

At 31 December 2015

At 1 January 2015

Customer 
Relationships

£m

 Intellectual  
Property

£m

Goodwill

£m

20.1

0.1

 20.2

 –

0.1

20.3

(12.3)

(2.3)

0.1

(14.5)

(1.9)

–

0.1

(16.3)

4.0

5.7

60.6

–

 60.6

 0.3

(0.2)

60.7

(40.3)

(4.8)

(0.1)

(45.2)

(4.8)

–

(0.1)

(50.1)

10.6

15.4

 Total

£m

294.2

0.7

 294.9

 0.3

0.2

295.4

(85.2)

(7.1)

–

(92.3)

(6.7)

(33.3)

–

(132.3)

213.5

0.6

 214.1

 –

0.3

214.4

(32.6)

–

–

(32.6)

–

(33.3)

–

(65.9)

148.5

163.1

181.5

202.6

Customer relationships and intellectual property are amortised on a straight-line basis over their estimated useful lives of between 
5 and 10 years. As from 1 January 2004, the date of transition to IFRS, goodwill is no longer amortised but is now subject to annual 
impairment testing (see note 11).

86

Annual Report 2015Financial Statements  
 
10 Investments in subsidiaries

Details of the investments in which the Group or Company holds more than 20% of the nominal value of ordinary share capital are 
as follows:

Name of Company

Held directly:

Country of 
Incorporation

Holding

Proportion of 
Voting Rights

Primary nature of Business

SDL Sheffield Limited

England & Wales

 Ordinary

SDL France SARL

SDL Sweden AB

SDL Global Solutions (Ireland) Limited

SDL International Belgium NV

SDL Software Technology  
(Shenzhen) Co Ltd

SDL Inc

SDL Poland Sp zoo

SDL Japan KK

SDL Holdings BV

France

Sweden

Ireland

Belgium

China

United States  
of America

Poland

Japan

Netherlands

SDL do Brazil Global Solutions Ltda

Brazil

 Ordinary 

 Ordinary

 Ordinary

 Ordinary

 Ordinary

 Ordinary

 Ordinary

 Ordinary

 Ordinary

SDL Nominees Ltd

England & Wales

 Ordinary

SDL Multilingual Solutions Private Ltd

SDL Hellas MEPE

Automated Language 
Processing Services Ltd

SDL Turkey Translation Services  
& Commerce Ltd

SDL Chile SA

 Alterian Ltd

India

Greece

 Ordinary

 Ordinary

England & Wales

 Ordinary

Turkey

Chile

 Ordinary

England & Wales

 Ordinary

 Bemoko Consulting Limited

England & Wales

 Ordinary

 SDL Global Limited

 England & Wales

 Ordinary

 SDL Portugal Unipessoal LDA

 Portugal

 Ordinary

Held indirectly:

SDL Passolo GmbH

SDL Italia Unipersonale Srl

Software Documentation  
Localization Spain, S.L.

SDL International (Canada) Inc 

SDL Netherlands BV 

Germany

Italy 

Spain 

Canada

Netherlands

SDL Multilingual Services GmbH & Co KG

Germany

SDL Multi-Lingual Solutions  
(Singapore) PTE Ltd

Singapore

 Ordinary

 Ordinary

 Ordinary

 Ordinary

 Ordinary

 Ordinary

 Ordinary

SDL Magyaror szaj szolgaltato  Kft 

Hungary

 Ordinary

SDL CZ sro

SDL Traduceri SRL

SDL Zagreb doo

SDL doo Ljubljana

Trados GmbH

SDL Tridion Development Centre LLC

Czech Republic

 Ordinary

Romania

Croatia

Slovenia

Germany

Ukraine

 Ordinary

 Ordinary

 Ordinary

 Ordinary

 Ordinary

 Ordinary

 100%

 Language Services and Technology

 100%

 100%

 100%

 100%

 100%

 100%

Language Services

Language Services

Language Services

Language Services and Technology

Language Services

Language Services and Technology

 100%

 100%

 100%

 100%

 100%

 100%

 100%

 100%

Language Services 

Language Services and Technology

Holding company

Language Services

Holding Company

Language Services

Language Services

Holding company

 Ordinary

 100%

Language Services

 100%

 100%

 100%

 100%

 100%

 100%

 100%

 100%

 100%

 100%

 100%

 100%

 100%

 100%

 100%

 100%

 100%

 100%

 100%

Language Services

Holding company

Technology

 Holding company

 Language Services

Technology

Language Services

Language Services

Language Services

Language Services

Language Services

Language Services

Language Services

Language Services

Language Services

Language Services

Language Services

Technology

Technology

87

Financial StatementsFinancial StatementsFinancial StatementsName of Company

SDL Tridion GmbH

Tridion AB

SDL Tridion Hispania SL

SDL Tridion Ltd

SDL Tridion KK

Interlingua Group Ltd

SDL Multilingual Service GmbH

SDL Multilingual Services Verwaltungs 
GmbH

ZAO SDL Rus

XyEnterprise LLP

XyEnterprise Ltd

SDL Fredhopper BV

SDL Fredhopper Ltd

Spring Technologies Ltd

SDL Xopus BV

Language Weaver SRL

SDL Media Manager BV

Alterian Holdings Ltd

Alterian Technology Ltd

Country of 
Incorporation

Germany

Sweden

Spain

Holding

 Ordinary

 Ordinary

 Ordinary

England & Wales

 Ordinary

Japan

 Ordinary

England & Wales

 Ordinary

Germany

Germany

Russia

United States  
of America

 Ordinary

 Ordinary

 Ordinary

 Ordinary

England & Wales

 Ordinary

Netherlands

 Ordinary 

England & Wales

 Ordinary 

Bulgaria

Netherlands

Romania

Netherlands

 Ordinary 

 Ordinary 

 Ordinary 

 Ordinary

England & Wales

 Ordinary

England & Wales

 Ordinary

SDL Technologies India PVT Ltd (formerly 
Alterian Technologies India PVT Ltd)

India

 Ordinary

Intrepid Consultants Ltd

England & Wales

 Ordinary 

SDL Technologies (Australia)  Pty Ltd

Australia

Alterian do Brazil Software e Servicos Ltda

Brazil

Alterian Pte Ltd

Alterian Vietnam Co Ltd

Alterian Holdings Inc

Alterian Inc

SDL Government Inc

Singapore

Vietnam

United States  
of America

United States  
of America

United States  
of America

 Ordinary

 Ordinary

 Ordinary

 Ordinary

 Ordinary

Proportion of 
Voting Rights

Primary nature of Business

 100%

 100%

 100%

 100%

 100%

 100%

 100%

 100%

 100%

 100%

 100%

 100%

 100%

 100%

 100%

 100%

 100%

 100%

 100%

 100%

 100%

 100%

 100%

 100%

 100%

 100%

Technology

Technology

Technology

Technology

Technology

Holding company

Holding company

Holding company

Language Services

Technology

Technology

Technology

Technology

Technology

Technology

Technology

Technology

Holding company

Technology

Technology

Technology

Technology

Technology

Technology

Technology

Holding company

 Ordinary

 100%

Technology

 Ordinary

 100%

Technology

Alpnet UK Ltd

England & Wales

 Ordinary

Computype Ltd (England)

England & Wales

 Ordinary

MediaSurface Ltd

Alterian (Poole) Ltd

Alterian (Newbury) Ltd

Alterian Minorities Ltd

Trados Belgium

Trados GmbH Swiss Branch

Trados Ireland Ltd

Idiom Technology Benelux BV

England & Wales

 Ordinary

England & Wales

 Ordinary

England & Wales

 Ordinary

England & Wales

 Ordinary

Belgium

Switzerland

Ireland

Netherlands

 Ordinary

 Ordinary

 Ordinary

 Ordinary

 100%

 100%

 100%

 100%

 100%

 100%

 100%

 100%

 100%

 100%

 Holding Company

 Holding Company

 Holding Company

 Holding Company

 Holding Company

 Holding Company

 Technology

 Holding Company

 Holding Company

 Holding Company

   The proportion of voting rights held is as shown above. SDL Global Limited was incorporated on 25 February 2016.

88

Annual Report 2015Financial Statements11  Impairment testing of goodwill and intangibles with indefinite lives

The Group has goodwill that has been acquired through business 
combinations but does not hold any intangible assets that have 
indefinite lives ascribed to them. 

The  approach  of  the  Group  is  to  test  impairment  at  the  cash 
generating  unit  level  or  group  of  cash  generating  units  where 
these represent the lowest level at which goodwill is monitored 
for internal reporting purposes. 

Following  the  Group’s  operational  review  in  2015  which  has  led 
to  changes  in  the  organisational  structure  and  management  of 
the  business,  the  Board  has  determined  that  there  are  six  CGUs 
and four operating segments. These CGUs have been aggregated 
into  groups  of  CGUs  for  testing  as  follows;  Language  Services, 
Language  Technology,  Global  Content  Technologies  and  Non-
Core Businesses which are consistent with the Group’s operating 
segments.  The  Group’s  operating  segments  are  disclosed  in 
Note  3. The  Non-Core  Businesses  segment  includes  the  Group’s 
Campaign,  Social  Intelligence  and  Fredhopper  CGUs  and  is  the 
lowest level of unit at which the Group is effectively able to monitor 
goodwill for these CGUs. The prior year Technology CGU has been 
disaggregated to create the Language Technology, Global Content 
Technologies and Non-Core Businesses CGU comparatives.

The goodwill has been allocated for impairment testing purposes 
to  these  operating  segments  and  full  attribution  of  overheads 
and group costs has been made to each of the units in testing 
impairment. The  valuation  is  performed  on  a  value  in-use  basis 
and this is compared against the respective operating segments’ 
expected realisable value.

In  order  to  evaluate  the  recoverable  amounts  relating  to  the 
operating segments, the following key information should be noted. 

The  recoverable  amounts  have  been  determined  using  the 
detailed  projections  from  the  2016  annual  plan  projected  for  a 
further four year period and subsequently into perpetuity, with a 
discount rate applied.

Carrying amount of goodwill allocated to operating segments:

 Language Services

 Language Technology

 Global Content Technologies

 Non-Core Businesses

Sensitivity to changes in assumptions

 The discount rate has been calculated as the weighted average 
cost  of  capital.  Differential  post-tax  discount  rates  were  used 
reflecting a different risk weighting based on relative maturity and 
size of the different cash generating units with 10.6% applied to 
Language Services (2014: 10.4%), 11.6% to Language Technology 
and  Global  Content  Technologies  and  14.5%  to  the  Non  Core 
Businesses (2014: Technology 11.1%). These discount rates reflect 
the  relative  maturity  of  the  businesses  and  the  risk  associated 
with  the  respective  operating  segment  forecasts.    In  aggregate, 
these discount rates approximate a group cost of capital of 11.4% 
for  2015  (2014:  10.8%).    Pre-tax  discount  rates  were  14.4%  for 
Language  Services,  15.5%  for  Language  Technology,  15.3%  for 
Global Content Technologies and 18.3% for Non-Core Businesses. 
(2014:12.9% to 13.4%). Budgets have been prepared at the cash 
generating  unit  level  based  on  historical  trends  adjusted  for 
expected events. These individual budgets have been aggregated 
as the basis for the 2016 Group annual plan. 

This methodology places strong emphasis on early year cash flows 
and  revenue  growth  assumptions  in  evaluating  impairment.  A 
common 2% perpetual growth rate has been used for all operating 
segments reflecting the relative maturity, penetration and profile 
of the operating segments (2014: 2% Language Services and 3% 
Technology operating segments respectively). Differential growth 
rates  have  been  applied  to  the  different  operating  segments 
beyond the budget period.  These are 6% (2014: 5%) for Language 
Services,  6.5%  for  Language Technology,  8%  for  Global  Content 
Technologies and 27% for the Non Core Businesses (2014: 9% for 
Technology operating segments). 

Following  a  disappointing  trading  year  in  2015  for  the  Group’s 
technology operating segments and the completion of the 2015 
operational  review,  the group has determined that  the  carrying 
value  of  goodwill  in  its  Language  Technology  and  Non-Core 
Businesses  operating  segments  were  impaired  by  £33.3  million.  
This amount was recognised in the income statement in 2015 (see 
note 4).

 2015
£m

 21.1

 48.0

 59.2

 20.2

 2014
£m

 21.1

 64.1

 59.0

 37.3

 148.5

 181.5

Management has identified three key assumptions which significantly impact the impairment amounts of the Language Technology 
and Non-Core Businesses operating segments.  The following table shows the absolute amount by which the impairment would 
change for unfavourable movements in these assumptions.

Change to the recoverable amount 
(£m)

Discount Rate (0.5%)

Perpetuity growth rate (1%)

Revenue growth (1%)

 Language 
Technology

 Non Core 
 Businesses

(2.7)

(3.5)

(3.1)

(1.3)

(1.6)

(1.3)

89

Financial StatementsFinancial StatementsFinancial StatementsThe recoverable amount of the Global Content Technologies operating segment exceeds it carrying amount by £9.3 million. The 
change in the assumptions above required for the recoverable amount of the Global Content Technologies operating segment to 
equal its carrying amount would be a 3.0% reduction in revenue assumptions or a 1.3% increase in the discount rate.  The elimination 
of the perpetuity growth rate alone would not lead to the recoverable amount being less than or equal to the operating segment 
carrying value.

Having performed its impairment test on the Language Services operating segment and having analysed the various sensitivities to 
this test, management believe that no reasonably possible change in any of the above key assumptions would cause the carrying 
value of the Language Services operating segment to exceed its recoverable amount.

Next impairment test

The next impairment tests will be performed at the 2016 year end. However, management continues to monitor the performance 
of its operating segments closely and should it believe a significant event has occurred which deteriorates the forward operating 
prospects of the business it will bring forward these tests.  

12  Trade and other receivables (current)

Trade receivables

Prepayments and accrued income

 2015
£m

 56.4

 17.0

 73.4

 2014
£m

 52.8

 16.6

69.4

All amounts are due within one year. Trade receivables are non-interest bearing and on average have thirty to sixty day settlement 
terms. Accrued income is the value of unbilled work recognised on projects in accordance with the accounting policy outlined in 
Note 2.

As at 31 December 2015, trade receivables at nominal value of £1.5 million (2014: £1.4 million) were impaired and provided for. 

Movements in the provision for impairment of receivables were as follows:

 At 1 January 2014

 Charge for the year

 Utilised in the year

 Currency adjustment

 At 31 December 2014

 Charge for the year

 Utilised in the year

 Currency adjustment

 At 31 December 2015

As at 31 December, the ageing analysis of trade receivables, net of impairment, is as follows:

 2015

 2014

 Total
£m

 56.4

 52.8

 Not past due  
£m

 <30 days
£m

 45.2

 42.7

 6.7

 6.2

 Past due

 30-60 days
 £m

 0.6

 1.6

The majority of the impairment provision is recorded in amounts greater than 60 days in 2015 and 2014.

 £m

 2.0

 0.2

 (0.8)

 –

 1.4

 0.2

 (0.1)

 –

 1.5

 >60 days
 £m

 3.9

 2.3

90

Annual Report 2015Financial Statements 
 
13  Cash and cash equivalents

Cash at bank and in hand

 2015
£m

17.2

 2014
£m

22.1

Where cash at bank and in hand earns interest, interest accrues at floating rates based on daily bank deposit rates. The fair value of 
cash and cash equivalents is £17.2 million (2014: £22.1 million). 

At 31 December 2015, the Group had available £20.2 million (2014: £21 million) of undrawn committed borrowing facilities.

For the purposes of the cash flow statement, cash and cash equivalents comprise the amounts shown above.

14  Trade and other payables (current)

Trade payables

Other taxes and social security costs

Other payables

Accruals and deferred income

The terms and conditions of the above financial liabilities are as follows:

Trade payables are non-interest bearing and are normally settled within 45 days;

Other taxes and social security costs are non-interest bearing and have an average term of 1 month;

Other payables, generally, are non-interest bearing and have an average term of 2 months.

15  Trade and other payables (non-current)

Other payables

Deferred income

 2015
£m

6.1

3.0

6.8

65.8

 81.7

 2014
£m

7.1

3.7

5.9

67.3

 84.0

 2015
£m

 –

 1.4

 1.4

 2014
£m

 0.1

 1.2

 1.3

Other payables include amounts payable under finance lease arrangements for purchase of property, plant and equipment.

The amounts payable under finance leases are set out below:

Future 
minimum 
lease 
payments
2015
£m

0.1

–

0.1

Interest

2015
£m

–

–

–

Present value 
of minimum 
lease 
payments
2015
£m

Future 
minimum 
lease 
payments
2014
£m

0.1

–

0.1

0.4

0.1

0.5

Interest

2014 
£m

–

–

–

Within one year

After one year but not more than 
five years

Present value 
of minimum 
lease 
payments
2014
£m

0.4

0.1

0.5

91

Financial StatementsFinancial StatementsFinancial Statements16 Loans and overdraft

Current liabilities

Instalments due on bank loans

Non-current liabilities

Instalments due on bank loans

 2015
£m

–

 2015
£m

 4.6

 2014
£m

 9.0

 2014
£m

 –

During the year, the Group repaid its borrowings from Royal Bank of Scotland.  On 3 August 2015, the Group signed a new 5 year 
£25 million revolving credit facility with HSBC plc, expiring on 2 August 2020. The agreement includes the provision of a £25 million 
Accordian (uncommitted) facility. The Group drew down £4.8 million of new borrowings and the balance sheet amount is stated 
net of £0.2m arrangement and related fees. 

Draw downs under the £25 million revolving credit facility are repayable in one, three and six month instalments and amounts can 
be redrawn at any time as long as covenant and other conditions are met. Accordingly drawdowns under this facility have been 
categorised as non-current. The loan bears interest at LIBOR+ margin, the margin varying between 1.15% and 1.9% depending on 
the ratio of the Group’s total net debt to its adjusted earnings before interest, tax, depreciation and amortisation. The Company and 
a number of subsidiaries have entered into cross guarantee arrangements to secure the drawings under this facility.

17 Provisions

 At 1 January 2015

 Arising during the year

 Released during the year

 Utilised

 At 31 December 2015

 Current 2015

 Non-current 2015

 Current 2014

 Non-current 2014

Property leases

 Property 
Leases
£m

 0.8

 –

 –

 (0.2)

 0.6

 0.2

 0.4

 0.6

 0.3

 0.5

 0.8

 Other

£m

 2.5

 0.5

 (0.1)

 (0.2)

 2.7

 2.7

 –

 2.7

 2.5

 –

 2.5

 Total

£m

 3.3

 0.5

 (0.1)

                 (0.4)

 3.3

 2.9

 0.4

 3.3

 2.8

 0.5

 3.3

The provision for property leases is in respect of leasehold premises, from which the Group no longer trades, but is liable to fulfil 
rent and other property commitments up to the lease expiry date.  Obligations are payable within a range of 1 to 7 years. Amounts 
provided  are  management’s  best  estimate  of  the  likely  future  cash  outflows. The  provision  has  been  discounted  using  market 
interest rates. The undiscounted provision is £0.7 million (2014: £0.9 million).

Other

Other provisions include a number of employee, legal, tax and product related amounts. Obligations are expected to be payable 
within 1 year.  Included in the above is a provision for £1.4 million (2014: £1.4 million) for ongoing litigation related to a former Trados 
shareholder’s claim of breach of fiduciary duty by the former Trados Directors on the sale of Trados to SDL in 2005. This liability has 
been settled in February 2016. 

92

Annual Report 2015Financial Statements 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
18 Share capital

Allotted, called up and fully paid

 Ordinary shares of 1p each

    At 1 January 

    Issued on exercise of share options

    Issued on exercise of LTIPS

    Issued as payment of contingent consideration

    At 31 December

The following movements in the ordinary share capital of the company 
occurred during the year:

1. 

 101,571 ordinary shares of 1p each were allotted under the SDL Share 
Option Scheme (1999), SDL Share Option Scheme (2010) and earlier 
Unapproved Option Schemes at a price range of 119 pence to 375 
pence per share for an aggregate consideration of £264,321.

2. 

 138,205 ordinary shares of 1p each were allotted under the SDL LTIP 
2011 Scheme.

19  Share-based payment plans

 2015 
millions

 2014 
millions

 2015
£m

 2014
£m

 81.0

 0.1

 0.1

 0.1

 81.3

 80.4

 0.3

 0.2

 0.1

 81.0

 0.8

 –

 –

 –

 0.8

 0.8

 –

 –

 –

 0.8

3. 

4. 

 2,844 ordinary shares of 1p each were allotted under the SDL Save 
As You Earn Schemes for an aggregate consideration of £7,997. 

 In March 2015, 87,068 ordinary shares of 1p each were allotted to 
four  former  shareholders  of  Bemoko  Consulting  Limited  as  final 
payment  of  the  contingent  consideration  due  as  a  result  of  the 
acquisition of Bemoko Consulting Limited by the group in 2013.

Included within administrative expenses is a charge of £1.5 million relating to the Group’s employee share schemes (2014: charge of 
£1.4 million). Details of the Group’s employee share schemes are set out below.

SDL Share Option Scheme 

On 23 April 2010, following shareholder approval, the “SDL Share Option Scheme (2010)” was adopted. This replaced the “SDL Share 
Option Scheme (1999)” for which options are still exercisable. The SDL Share Option Scheme (2010) permits the granting of both 
options approved by HM Revenue and Customs within the statutory £30,000 limit and unapproved options, subject to performance 
conditions. From 2010 onwards, all options have been granted in accordance with these rules.

The table below sets out the number and weighted average exercise prices (WAEP) of, and movements in, the SDL Share Options 
Scheme during the year:

 Outstanding at the beginning of the year

 Granted during the year

 Forfeited during the year

 Exercised during the year

 Outstanding at the end of the year

 Exercisable at 31 December 

 2015
 No.

 883,674

 517,000

 (528,999)

 (102,590)

 769,085

 145,585

 2015
 WAEP

 £4.03

 £3.77

 £4.27

 £2.61

£3.87

 £2.84

2014
No.

 1,175,018

 227,500

 (224,476)

 (294,368)

 883,674

 248,175

 2014
WAEP

 £3.83

 £3.34

 £5.76

 £1.26

 £4.03

 £2.74

The weighted average share price at the date of exercise for the options exercised is £3.87 (2014: £3.11).

For the share options outstanding as at 31 December 2015, the weighted average remaining contractual life is 7.77 years (2014: 6.98 
years). 

The fair value of equity settled share options granted under the SDL Share Option Scheme is estimated as at the date of grant using 
the Black Scholes model.  The following table lists the inputs and key output to the model:

 Weighted average share price (pence)

 Weighted average fair value at grant date (pence)

 Expected volatility

 Expected option life

 Expected dividends

 Risk-free interest rate

 2015

 387

 110

  38%

 3 years

 0.57%

 0.71%

 2014

 335

 90

 38%

 3 years

 0%

 1.11%

93

Financial StatementsFinancial StatementsFinancial Statements 
 
 
 
The range of exercise prices for options outstanding at the end of the year was £2.79-£4.45  (2014: £1.19-£7.48).

Exercise price

Date of Grant

Exercise Period

£1.01 - £1.50

£2.01 - £2.50

£2.51 - £3.00

£3.01 - £3.50

£3.51 - £4.00

£4.01 - £4.50

£7.01 - £7.50

Total

02/04/04-04/04/05

10 years after grant date

22/03/06-03/10/06

10 years after grant date

28/02/08-02/03/09

10 years after grant date

07/04/14

23/05/07

10 years after grant date

10 years after grant date

17/04/13-17/04/15

10 years after grant date

10/04/12

10 years after grant date

2015
Number

–

–

145,585

185,500

–

438,000

–

769,085

2014
Number

7,500

23,700

211,775

216,500

5,200

298,343

120,656

883,674

SDL Long Term Incentive Plan

The  SDL  Long Term  Share  Incentive  Plan,  which  was  approved  by  shareholders  in  April  2006  (“the  2006  plan”),  expired  for  the 
purposes  of  new  awards  in  April  2011.  No  further  awards  could  be  made  after  the  expiry  date  but  existing  awards  will  remain 
protected although they will only vest to the extent that the related performance conditions are met.   

The 2006 plan has been replaced with the SDL Long Term Share Incentive Plan (2011) (“the 2011 Plan”) which received approval from 
shareholders in April 2011. The 2011 Plan is broadly similar in construction. It has been updated to reflect current law and market 
practice and the proposed performance conditions are designed to be more closely aligned to the company’s current business 
strategy and objectives. 

On 17 April 2015, 767,206 shares were granted under the 2011 Plan to the Executive Directors based on a market price of £4.37, with 
a performance period of three years from date of grant. 

The fair value of equity-settled shares granted under the SDL Long Term Incentive Plan is estimated as at the date of grant using a 
Monte-Carlo model, taking into account the terms and conditions upon which the options were granted. The following table lists 
the inputs and key output to the model used in the year of grant:

 Expected volatility

 Weighted average fair value at grant date (pence)

 Expected life

 Expected dividends

 Risk-free interest rate

 Outstanding at the beginning of the year

 Granted during the year

 Exercised during the year

 Forfeited during the year

 Outstanding at the end of the year

 Exercisable at 31 December 

 2015

 38%

 385

 3 years

 0.57%

 0.71%

2014
No.

 1,913,838

 1,149,547

 (74,454)

 (870,882)

 2,118,049

 Nil

 2014

 39%

 221

 3 years

 0%

 1.00%

 2014
WAEP

£0.01

£0.01

£0.01

£0.01

£0.01

–

 2015
 No.

 2,118,049

 767,206

 (138,205)

 (1,841,007)

 906,043

 Nil

 2015
 WAEP

 £0.01

 £0.01

 £0.01

 £0.01

 £0.01

 –

All LTIPs are exercisable at nil cost to the individual (with the exception of the 1p nominal value of each share awarded).

Retention Share Plan

In recognition of the fact that there will be three consecutive years in which the LTIP and Option awards are unlikely to meet the 
performance criteria required to vest, the Board approved, in 2013, a share-based discretionary award which was made to a small 
targeted group of executives (excluding Executive Directors).  Awards are based on a percentage of salary and vest in equal tranches, 
any unvested portion of a tranche lapses. The Board believes that this Retention Share Plan (RSP) will provide benefit to the Group by 
creating appropriate performance incentives and facilitating the long-term retention of employees who add significant value. The 
Remuneration Committee has the discretion to settle any awards that vest in cash or via shares.

The RSP was not approved by shareholders and therefore any shares required to satisfy vesting are either purchased by the Employee 
Benefit Trust or cash settled. The funding of the trust is by way of a loan to the trustees. 

94

Annual Report 2015Financial StatementsOn 27 April 2015, 280,430 shares were granted under the RSP to a small group of senior management excluding Executive Directors. 
This plan is due to vest on the anniversary of the grant date i.e. April 2016.  

The fair value of equity-settled shares granted under the SDL Retention Share Plan is estimated as at the date of grant using a Black 
Scholes model, taking into account the terms and conditions upon which the options were granted. The following table lists the 
inputs and key output to the model used in the year of grant:

 Expected volatility

 Weighted average fair value at grant date (pence)

 Expected life

 Expected dividends

 Risk-free interest rate 

Outstanding at the beginning of the year

Granted during the year

Exercised during the year

Forfeited during the year

Outstanding at the end of the year

Exercisable at 31 December 

 2015

29.8%

 464 

 1 year

 0.5%                        

 0.37%

 2015
No.

 168,500

 280,430

 (147,000)

 (26,216)

  275,714

 19,000

 2014

 43.9%

 343

 1 year

 0%

 0.22%

2014
No.

 678,196

 52,000

 (135,500)

 (426,196)

 168,500

21,500                             

All RSPs are exercisable at nil cost to the individual (with the exception of the 1p nominal value of each share awarded).

SDL Save As You Earn Scheme

On 24 April 2008 a Save As You Earn (SAYE) scheme was formally approved by the shareholders at the AGM. Following the success 
of the UK and Netherlands SAYE schemes, in 2012 an extension to the international version was rolled out to SDL PLC’s subsidiary 
companies in the United States and Canada. The rules are based on those of the UK in that employees must be eligible and there 
is a monthly savings contract over a 3 year period.  In 2015, 2014, 2013 and 2012, options were granted to UK, Netherlands, Canada 
and United States scheme participants at 80% of the prevailing market price. The market price is taken the day prior to the date of 
invitations to apply for an option. There are no performance conditions attached to the exercise of these options. These options may 
be exercised within a fixed six-month period, three years from the date of grant or being made redundant.

The table below sets out the number and movements in, the SDL Save As You Earn Scheme during the year:

Outstanding at the beginning of the year

Granted during the year

Exercised during the year

Forfeited during the year

Outstanding at the end of the year

Exercisable at 31 December 

 2015
 No.

 633,342

 117,454

 (2,844)

 (74,827)

 673,125

 Nil

 2014
No.

 391,447

 432,141

 (1,106)

 (189,140)

 633,342

 Nil

For the SAYE shares outstanding as at 31 December 2015, the weighted average remaining contractual life is 1.5 years (2014: 2.18 years). 

The fair value of equity settled share options granted under the SDL SAYE Scheme is estimated as at the date of grant using the Black 
Scholes model. The following table lists the inputs and key output to the model in the year of grant:

 Weighted average share price (pence)

 Expected volatility

 Expected option life

 Expected dividends

 Risk-free interest rate

 2015

 435

 37.5%

 3.2 years

 0.57%

 0.93%

 2014

 317

 37%

 1.6 years

 0%

 1.27%

For all Share Based payment models, the volatility is calculated from compounded daily logs of normal returns of the company share 
price over a historic period commensurate with the expected life of the incentive.

95

Financial StatementsFinancial StatementsFinancial Statements20 Additional cash flow information

Analysis of Group net debt:

 1 January 2015

 Cash flow

Cash and cash equivalents

Loans and overdrafts*

£m

 22.1

 (9.0)

 13.1

£m

 (3.4)

 4.2

 0.8

 Cash acquired  
on acquisition
£m

 Exchange 
differences
£m

 31 December 
2015
£m

 –

 –

 –

 (1.5)

 –

 (1.5)

 17.2

 (4.8)

 12.4

* Loans and overdrafts are stated gross i.e. before the impact of a £0.2m arrangement fee prepayment

Cash and cash equivalents

Loans and overdrafts

 1 January 2014

 Cash flow

£m

 18.2

 (20.0)

 (1.8)

£m

 4.4

 11.0

 15.4

 Cash acquired  
on acquisition
£m

 Exchange 
differences
£m

 –

 –

 –

 (0.5)

 –

 (0.5)

 31 December 2014

£m

 22.1

 (9.0)

 13.1

21 Commitments and contingencies

The Group has entered into commercial leases on certain properties used as offices. The future minimum rentals payable under non-
cancellable operating leases as at 31 December are as follows: 

Within one year

After one year but  
not more than five years

More than five years

 Land and buildings

 Other

 Total

2015
£m

 4.3

 10.3

 0.3

 14.9

2014
£m

 4.3

 11.9

 0.5

 16.7

2015
£m

 0.6

 0.6

 –

 1.2

2014
£m

 0.2

 0.2

 –

 0.4

2015
£m

 4.9

 10.9

 0.3

 16.1

2014
£m

 4.5

 12.1

 0.5

 17.1

The future minimum rentals receivable under non-cancellable operating leases as at 31 December 2015 were £0.2 million (2014: 
£0.2 million). 

 The Group operates in 40 countries around the world and, in common with other multinational organisations, is subject to ongoing 
tax audits and reviews.  The Group operates in line with local and global regulations and maintains provisions where any deviations 
from these regulations are identified.  The nature of tax compliance is inherently subject to interpretation and hence additional 
liabilities or exposures could arise.

22 Related party disclosures

Compensation of key management personnel of the Group

Short term employee benefits

Post employment benefits

Total compensation paid to key management personnel

 2015
£m

 2.4

 0.1

 2.5

 2014
£m

 2.2

 0.1

 2.3

Full details of the Directors’ remuneration is included in the Directors’ Remuneration Report on pages 42 to 58.

Transactions  between  group  companies,  which  are  related  parties,  have  been  eliminated  on  consolidation  and  have  not  been 
included in this note. The key management personnel are the Executive Directors of the Group.

96

Annual Report 2015Financial Statements 
 
 
23 Financial risk management objectives and policies

An explanation of the Group’s financial risk management objectives, policies and strategies are set out in the Strategic Report on 
pages 4 to 27.

Interest Rate Risk:  Net cash has decreased from £13.1 million in 2014 to £12.4 million cash in 2015. Borrowings amounted to £4.6 
million  at  December  2015  (see  note  16)  which  bears  interest  at  LIBOR+  margin,  the  margin  varying  between  1.15%  and  1.9% 
depending on the ratio of the Group’s total net debt to its adjusted earnings before interest, tax, depreciation and amortisation.  
The Board remains of the opinion that operating with low levels of debt is appropriate in the current economic environment, whilst 
maintaining sufficient debt facility headroom to finance normal investment activities. 

To ensure adequate working capital the Group maintains cash deposits and these deposits are affected by any movements in rates 
of interest generally. These cash deposits are generally receiving interest income at LIBOR (or USD, EURO equivalent) plus a margin. 
The  Group  seeks  to  place  all  cash  surplus  to  operational  requirements  in  secure  money  market  funds. To  enhance  the  interest 
earning capacity of the Group, processes have been put in place to ensure that cash balances held by subsidiary companies are kept 
as low as operationally possible. With regard to relative interest rates, adequate cash is retained in key operating currencies to fund 
the operational needs of the Group. 

The following table demonstrates the sensitivity to a 1 percent change in the UK £ interest rate:

Profit before tax gain/(loss)

 + 1 %

 – 1 %

The following table demonstrates the sensitivity to a 1 percent change in the Euro interest rate:

Profit before tax gain/(loss)

 + 1 %

 – 1 %

The following table demonstrates the sensitivity to a 1 percent change in the US$ interest rate:

Profit before tax gain/(loss)

 + 1 %

 – 1 %

 2015
£m

 –

 –

 2015
£m

 –

 –

 2015
£m

 –

 –

 2014
£m

 (0.1)

 0.1

 2014
£m

 –

 –

 2014
£m

 0.1

 (0.1)

Liquidity  Risk:  The  Group’s  objective  is  to  optimise  the  funds 
currently  available  to  it  in  order  to  maintain  the  lowest 
operational  borrowing  profile  necessary.  At  the  end  of  2015, 
the  Group  had  net  cash  of  £12.4  million  which  comprised 
of  cash  balances  of  £17.2  million  and  loans  of  £4.8  million. 
Underpinning  this  philosophy  are  processes  to  manage 
operating  cash  flow,  with  a  focus  on  approvals  policy  for 
significant cash outlays and credit control. The Group’s existing 
loan facility expires on 2 August 2020.

Foreign Currency Risk: A significant amount of business is done 
with customers in both the USA and Continental Europe with 
approximately  47%  of  total  invoicing  done  in  US  Dollar  and 
26% in Euro. The most significant sensitivity is to the US Dollar 
as illustrated below. This overseas client base gives rise to short-
term debtors and cash balances in both US Dollars and Euros. 
Consequently,  the  movements  in  the  US  Dollar/Sterling  and 
Euro/Sterling exchange rates affect the Group Balance Sheet, as 
well as the Consolidated Income Statement. The Group seeks 
to manage this risk in the first instance by looking to a natural 
hedge and ensuring where possible currency needs in the USA 
are  funded  from  the  settlement  of  US  Dollar  denominated

debtors.  After  a  review  of  effectiveness  the  Group  has  not 
entered into any new US Dollar hedges since 2008. At the end of 
2015, the Group has no hedges outstanding. 

In addition, the Group has exposure on the Balance Sheet to the 
movements  in  US  Dollar/Sterling  and  Euro/Sterling  exchange 
rates  as  a  result  of  intangible  assets  held  in  non  functional 
currency,  the  retranslation  of  US  and  continental  European 
overseas subsidiaries net assets into UK Sterling for consolidation 
purposes and finally intercompany loan and trading relationships 
held in non functional currency. In the case of the latter, this can 
have  an  impact  on  net  profitability  where  the  intercompany 
relationships are not treated for accounting purposes as equity 
loans.  

Income  Statement 

is  also  affected  by 
The  Consolidated 
movements in the US Dollar/Sterling and Euro/Sterling exchange 
rates when sales to customers are converted to Sterling at the 
date  of  the  sales  transaction,  as  this  will  vary  from  month  to 
month. This  is  partially  offset  by  the  effect  of  retranslating  US 
Dollar and Euro denominated costs into UK Sterling from month 
to month. 

97

Financial StatementsFinancial StatementsFinancial StatementsThe following table demonstrates the sensitivity to a 1 percent change in the US Dollar exchange rate:

Profit before tax gain/(loss)

+ 1 %

– 1 %

Statement of Financial Position* increase/(decrease) in net assets

+ 1 %

– 1 %

The following table demonstrates the sensitivity to a 1 percent change in the Euro exchange rate:

Profit before tax gain/(loss)

+ 1 %

– 1 %

Statement of Financial Position* increase/(decrease) in net assets

+ 1 %

– 1 %

* Based on the Statement of Financial Position at 31 December

Economic  Conditions  -  Credit  Control  Risk:  -  SDL  continues  to 
benefit  from  a  diverse  list  of  major  clients  of  which  no  client 
contributes  more  than  5%  of  sales.  The  Group  is  however 
continuing  to  place  emphasis  on  sound  application  of  credit 
control  processes  given  the  continuing  difficult  macro-
economic  conditions. The  Group  has  made  provision  against 
trade receivables to reflect specific collection risks identified. 

Capital Management: The Board monitors the total equity, cash 
and cash equivalents and borrowing balances in considering its

24 Financial instruments

 2015
£m

 (0.9)

0.9

(0.8)

0.8

 2015
£m

 (0.2)

0.2

(0.7)

 0.7

 2014
£m

 (0.8)

 0.8

 (0.7)

 0.7

 2014
£m

 –

 –

 (1.3)

 1.3

retained  capital  and  when  and  how  a  return  of  capital  to 
shareholders is appropriate. The Group maintains a strong capital 
base  so  as  to  maintain  employee,  customer,  market,  investor 
and  creditor  confidence  in  the  business  and  to  ensure  that  it 
continues to operate as a going concern. The Board operates a 
progressive dividend policy whereby dividends are set based on 
the evolution of the Group’s profits. The Board is recommending 
a final dividend in respect of the year end ended 31 December 
2015  of  [3.1]  pence  per  share.  Neither  the  Company  nor  the 
Group is subject to externally imposed capital requirements. 

Interest rate risk profile of financial assets and liabilities

The interest rate profile of the financial assets and liabilities of the Group as at 31 December is as follows:

Year ended 31 December 2015

Floating rate

Cash

Borrowings

2015
£m

 1.1

 (4.6)

Maturity of financial liabilities

The table below summarises the maturity profile of the Group’s financial liabilities at 31 December 2015:

Trade and other payables 

Long term loans

Finance lease liability

98

  Less than 12 
months
£m

  Over 12 
months
£m

39.1

–

0.1

–

4.6

–

39.2

               4.6

2014
£m

 2.4

 (9.0)

 Total

£m

39.1

4.6

0.1

43.8

Annual Report 2015Financial Statements 
 
 
 
The table below summarises the maturity profile of the Group’s financial liabilities at 31 December 2014:

Trade and other payables

Short term loans

Finance lease liability

 Less than 12 
months
£m

 Over 12 
 months
£m

39.8

9.0

0.4

49.2

0.1

-

0.1

0.2

 Total

£m

39.9

9.0

0.5

49.4

The above tables exclude deferred income and state tax creditors. 

The future contractual cash outflows related to the Group’s financial liabilities is not materially different from its carrying amount.

Borrowing facilities

The  Group  maintains  a  £25  million  facility  with  HSBC  Bank  PLC  which  expires  on  2nd  August  2020.   The  amount  drawn  at  31 
December 2015 was £4.8 million.

Credit risk

The maximum credit risk exposure related to financial assets is £68.6 million (2014: £64.0 million) represented by the carrying value 
of trade debtors and other receivables excluding prepayment and cash. 

Fair values of financial assets and liabilities

The carrying value of financial assets and liabilities approximate their fair value. Fair values of assets and liabilities are based on their 
carrying values. The Directors consider that there were no material differences between the book values and fair values of all the 
Group’s financial assets and liabilities at each year-end. The fair values have been calculated using the market interest rates where 
applicable. 

There are no hedging arrangements in place as at 31 December 2015 (2014: None). 

The interest rate risk on the borrowings at 31 December 2015 is directly linked to the 1, 3 month and 6 month LIBOR and is set out 
in note 16. The interest rates that the Group would pay under the facilities are linked directly to these LIBOR rates.

25 Events after the statement of financial position date

There are no other known events occurring after the statement of financial position date that require disclosure. 

99

Financial StatementsFinancial StatementsFinancial Statements  
 
Company Balance Sheet

at 31 December 2015

Notes

 2

 3

 4

 5

 6

 6

 7

 8

 9

2015
£m

 0.7

 149.9

 0.1

 150.7

 105.7

 1.0

 106.7

2014
£m

 0.8

 199.9

 0.1

 200.8

 68.6

 3.6

 72.2

        (120.9)

 -

 (120.9)

 (132.0)

 (9.0)

 (141.0)

(14.2)

 (68.8)

136.5

132.0

 (4.6)

 (0.4)

         (5.0) 

 (2.4)

129.1

 0.8

 98.5

29.8

129.1

 -

 (0.5)

 (0.5)

 (2.8)

128.7

 0.8

 97.9

 30.0

128.7

D Lavelle
Director

Fixed assets

 Tangible assets

 Investment in subsidiaries

 Rent deposits

Current assets

 Debtors

 Cash at bank and in hand

Current liabilities

 Creditors: amounts falling due within one year

 Interest bearing loans and borrowings

Net Current Assets / (Liabilities) 

Total assets less current liabilities

Creditors: amounts falling due after more than one year

 Interest bearing loans and borrowings

 Other payables

Provisions for liabilities and charges

Capital and reserves

Called up share capital

Share premium account

Profit and loss account

Total equity

Approved by the Board of directors on 15 March 2015

D Clayton
Director

100

Annual Report 2015Financial Statements 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Company Statement of Changes in Equity

For the year ended 31 December 2015

 At 1 January 2014

 Profit for the period

 Currency translation differences on net investments

 Arising on share issues

 Share based payments

 At 1 January 2015

 Profit for the period

 Dividend paid

 Currency translation differences on net investments

 Arising on share issues

 Share based payments

 At 31 December 2015

 Share
 Capital
 £m

 0.8

 –

 –

 –

 –

 0.8

 –

 –

 –

 –

 0.8

 Share
 Premium
 Account
 £m

 Profit &
 Loss
 Account
 £m

 97.4

 –

 –

 0.5

 –

 97.9

 –

 –

 0.6

 –

 98.5

 18.5

 10.2

 0.1

 –

 1.2

 30.0

0.6

 (2.0)

 (0.1)

 –

 1.3

29.8

 Total
 £m

 116.7

 10.2

 0.1

 0.5

 1.2

 128.7

0.6

           (2.0)

 (0.1)

 0.6

 1.3

129.1

101

Financial StatementsFinancial StatementsFinancial Statements 
 
Notes to the Accounts

for the year ended 31 December 2015

1 Accounting policies

 The principal accounting policies that have been consistently 
applied  in  arriving  at  the  financial  information  set  out  in  this 
report are:

•  Certain  disclosures 

IFRS  13  Fair  Value 
required  by 
Measurement  and  the  disclosures  required  by  IFRS  7 
Financial Instrument Disclosures.

• 

The Company proposes to continue the reduced disclosure 
framework of FRS 101 in its next financial statements.

Basis of preparation

Fixed assets and depreciation

The  financial  statements  are  prepared  under  the  historical 
cost  convention  as  modified  for  certain  items  which  have 
been  measured  at  fair  value,  namely  financial  instruments. 
These  financial  statements  were  prepared  in  accordance 
with  Financial  Reporting  Standard  101  Reduced  Disclosure 
Framework (“FRS 101”).  The amendments to FRS 101 (2014/15 
Cycle) issued in July 2015 and effective immediately have been 
applied.

In preparing these financial statements, the Company applies 
the recognition, measurement and disclosure requirements of 
International Financial Reporting Standards as adopted by the 
EU (“Adopted IFRSs”), but makes amendments where necessary 
in order to comply with Companies Act 2006 and has set out 
below where advantage of the FRS 101 disclosure exemptions 
has been taken. 

Under section s408 of the Companies Act 2006 the company 
is exempt from the requirement to present its own profit and 
loss account. 

In the transition to FRS 101, the Company has applied IFRS 1 
whilst  ensuring  that  its  assets  and  liabilities  are  measured  in 
compliance with FRS 101.  An explanation of how the transition 
to FRS 101 has affected the reported financial position of the 
Company is provided in note 12.

In  these  financial  statements,  the  company  has  applied  the 
exemptions available under FRS 101 in respect of the following 
disclosures: 

• 

a Cash Flow Statement and related notes; 

Fixed  assets  are  stated  at  cost  less  accumulated  depreciation 
and accumulated impairment losses.

Where  parts  of  an  item  of  fixed  assets  have  different  useful 
lives, they are accounted for as separate items of tangible fixed 
assets.

Depreciation is provided to write off the cost less the estimated 
residual  value  of  tangible  fixed  assets  over  their  estimated 
useful economic lives as follows:

Leasehold improvements  –   The lower of ten years or the 

lease term straight line

Computer equipment 

–  4-5 years straight line

Fixtures & fittings 

–  20% reducing balance

Motor vehicles 

–  20% reducing balance

Depreciation  methods,  useful  lives  and  residual  values  are 
reviewed at each balance sheet date.

Foreign currencies

Transactions in foreign currencies are recorded using the rate of 
exchange ruling at the date of the transaction. Monetary assets 
and liabilities denominated in foreign currencies are translated 
using the rate of exchange ruling at the balance sheet date and 
the gains or losses on translation are included in the profit and 
loss account.

The  currency  translation  differences  on  retranslation  of  the 
foreign  branches  at  the  balance  sheet  date  are  recognised 
directly in equity.

•  Comparative  period  reconciliations 

for  share  capital, 

tangible fixed assets and investments in subsidiaries; 

Financial instruments

•  Disclosures  in  respect  of  transactions  with  wholly  owned 

subsidiaries; 

•  Disclosures in respect of capital management;  

• 

The effects of new but not yet effective IFRSs;

•  An additional balance sheet for the beginning of the earliest 
comparative  period  for  the  reclassification  of  items  in  the 
financial statements (see note 12); and

•  Disclosures 

in  respect  of  the  compensation  of  Key 

Management Personnel.

As the consolidated financial statements include the equivalent 
disclosures, the Company has also taken the exemptions under 
FRS 101 available in respect of the following disclosures:

• 

IFRS  2  Share  Based  Payments  in  respect  of  group  settled 
share based payments; and

102

The  Company  considers  the  use  of  forward  foreign  currency 
contracts and interest rate swaps to reduce exposure to foreign 
exchange and interest rates. Where such instruments are taken 
out, they are stated at fair value. Gains and losses arising from 
changes in fair value are taken to the profit and loss account in 
the period. 

Non derivative financial instruments comprise debtors, cash at 
bank and in hand, interest bearing loans and borrowings and 
creditors.

Debtors

Debtors  are  recognised  initially  at  fair  value.  Subsequent  to 
initial recognition they are measured at amortised cost using 
the effective interest method, less any impairment losses.

Annual Report 2015Financial StatementsCreditors

Trade and other creditors are recognised initially at fair value. 
Subsequent  to 
initial  recognition  they  are  measured  at 
amortised cost using the effective interest method.

Interest bearing loans and borrowings

Interest  bearing  borrowings  are  recognised  initially  at  fair 
value 
less  attributable  transaction  costs.  Subsequent  to 
initial  recognition,  interest  bearing  borrowings  are  stated  at 
amortised  cost  using  the  effective  interest  method,  less  any 
impairment losses.

 Cash

Cash in bank represents cash in hand and deposits repayable 
with any qualifying institution.

Leases

Operating  lease  rentals  are  charged  to  the  profit  and  loss 
account  on  a  straight-line  basis  over  the  period  of  the  lease. 
Operating  lease  income  is  credited  to  the  profit  and  loss 
account on a straight-line basis over the period of the lease.

Incentives received from landlord

The aggregate benefit of incentives is recognised as a credit to 
the profit and loss account. The benefits of the incentives are 
allocated over the life of the lease on a straight line basis.

Pension cost

The  Company  contributes  to  a  group  personal  pension 
scheme  for  qualifying  employees  whereby  it  makes  defined 
contributions to independently administered personal pension 
schemes.  The Company does not control any of the assets or 
have  any  ongoing  liabilities  with  regard  to  the  performance 
of  and  payments  from  these  individual  personal  schemes.  
Obligations for contributions to defined contribution pension 
plans  are  recognised  as  an  expense  in  the  profit  and  loss 
account in the periods during which services are rendered by 
employees.  

Research and development

Research  costs  are  expensed  as 
incurred.  Development 
expenditure  incurred  on  an  individual  project  is  capitalised 
when  its  future  recoverability  can  reasonably  be  regarded 
as  assured  and  technical  feasibility  and  commercial  viability 
can  be  demonstrated.  Where  these  criteria  are  not  met  the 
expenditure is expensed to the income statement.

Revenue

Revenue is recognised to the extent that it is probable that the 
economic benefits will flow to the Company and the revenue 
can  be  measured  reliably.  The  following  specific  recognition 
criteria must also be met before revenue is recognised:

•  Rendering of services

Revenue  on  service  contracts  is  recognised  only  when  their 
outcomes  can  be  foreseen  with  reasonable  certainty  and  is 
based on the percentage stage of completion of the contracts, 
calculated on the basis of costs incurred. Accrued and deferred 
revenue arising on contracts is included in debtors as accrued 
income and creditors as deferred income as appropriate.  

Support and maintenance contracts are invoiced in advance 
and  normally  run  for  periods  of  12  months  with  automatic 

renewal  on  the  anniversary  date.  Revenue  in  respect  of 
support and maintenance contracts is recognised evenly over 
the contract period.

Managed services (hosting) fees are recognised over the term 
of the hosting contract on a straight-line basis.

Professional  services  and  consulting  revenue,  which 
is 
provided on  a ‘time and expense’ basis, is  recognised as  the 
service is performed.

For  multiple  element  arrangements  revenue  is  allocated  to 
each element on fair value regardless of any separate prices 
stated within the contract. The portion of the revenue allocated 
to  an  element  is  recognised  when  the  revenue  recognition 
criteria for that element have been met.

•  Sale of goods

Revenue  from  the  sale  of  goods  is  recognised  when  the 
significant  risks  and  rewards  of  ownership  of  the  goods 
have passed to the buyer, usually on delivery of the goods.

Revenue on software licenses and upgrades is recognised 
on  delivery,  when  there  are  no  significant  vendor 
obligations  remaining  and  the  collection  of  the  resulting 
receivable is considered probable. In circumstances where 
a considerable future vendor obligation exists as part of a 
software  licence  and  related  services  contract,  revenue  is 
recognised  over  the  period  that  the  obligation  exists  per 
the contract.   

Taxation

The charge for current taxation is based on the results for the year 
as  adjusted  for  items  which  are  non-assessable  or  disallowed, 
based on tax rates that are enacted or substantively enacted at 
the balance sheet date.

Deferred income tax is provided, using the liability method, on 
temporary  differences  at  the  balance  sheet  date  between  the 
tax bases of assets and liabilities and their carrying amounts for 
financial reporting purposes.

Deferred  income  tax  liabilities  are  recognised  for  all  taxable 
temporary differences except:

•  where the deferred income tax liability arises from the initial 
recognition of an asset or liability in a transaction that is not 
a business combination and, at the time of the transaction, 
affects  neither  the  accounting  profit  or  loss  nor  taxable 
profit or loss; and

• 

in respect of taxable temporary differences associated with 
investments in subsidiaries, where the timing of the reversal 
of  the  temporary  differences  can  be  controlled  and  it  is 
probable that the temporary differences will not reverse in 
the foreseeable future.

Deferred  income  tax  assets  are  recognised  for  all  deductible 
temporary differences, carry-forward of unused tax assets and 
unused tax losses, to the extent that it is probable that taxable 
profit will be available against which the deductible temporary 
differences,  and  the  carry-forward  of  unused  tax  assets  and 
unused tax losses can be utilised, except:

•  where  the  deferred  income  tax  asset  relating  to  the 
deductible  temporary  difference  arises  from  the  initial 
recognition of an asset or liability in a transaction that is not 
a business combination and, at the time of the transaction, 

103

Financial StatementsFinancial StatementsFinancial Statementsaffects  neither  the  accounting  profit  or  loss  nor  taxable 
profit or loss; and

• 

in respect of deductible temporary differences associated 
with  investments  in  subsidiaries,  deferred  tax  assets  are 
only  recognised  to  the  extent  that  it  is  probable  that  the 
temporary differences will reverse in the foreseeable future 
and  taxable  profit  will  be  available  against  which  the 
temporary differences can be utilised.

An impairment loss is recognised for the amount by which the 
asset’s carrying amount exceeds its recoverable amount.  The 
recoverable  amount  is  the  higher  of  an  asset’s  fair  value  less 
costs to sell and its value in use, where value in use is calculated 
as  the  present  value  of  the  future  cash  flows  expected  to  be 
derived from the asset. For the purpose of assessing impairment, 
assets  are  grouped  at  the  lowest  levels  for  which  there  are 
separately identifiable income streams (cash generating units).

The carrying amount of deferred income tax assets is reviewed 
at  each  balance  sheet  date  and  reduced  to  the  extent  that 
it  is  no  longer  probable  that  sufficient  taxable  profit  will  be 
available to allow all or part of the deferred income tax asset 
to be utilised.

In  the  United  Kingdom,  the  Company  is  entitled  to  a  tax 
deduction  for  amounts  treated  as  remuneration  on  exercise 
of certain employee share options. As explained under ‘Share 
based  payments’  below,  a  remuneration  expense  is  recorded 
in  the  income  statement  over  the  period  from  the  grant 
date to the vesting date of the relevant options. As there is a 
temporary difference between the accounting and tax bases, 
a  deferred  tax  asset  may  be  recorded. The  deferred  tax  asset 
arising on share option awards is calculated as the estimated 
amount of tax deduction to be obtained in the future (based 
on  the  Company’s  share  price  at  the  balance  sheet  date) 
pro-rated  to  the  extent  that  the  services  of  the  employee 
have  been  rendered  over  the  vesting  period.  If  this  amount 
exceeds the cumulative amount of the remuneration expense 
at the statutory rate, the excess is recorded directly in equity, 
against retained earnings. Similarly, current tax relief in excess 
of the cumulative amount of the remuneration expense at the 
statutory rate is also recorded in profit and loss account.

Deferred income tax assets and liabilities are measured at the 
tax rates that are expected to apply to the year when the asset 
is realised or the liability is settled, based on tax rates (and tax 
laws) that have been enacted or substantively enacted at the 
balance sheet date.

Income  tax  relating  to  items  recognised  directly  in  equity  is 
recognised in equity and not in the income statement.

Revenues, expenses and assets are recognised net of the amount 
of VAT except:

•  where the VAT incurred on a purchase of goods and services 
is not recoverable from the taxation authority, in which case 
the VAT is recognised as part of the cost of acquisition of the 
asset or as part of the expense item as applicable; and

• 

trade receivables and payables are stated with the amount 
of VAT included.

The  net  amount  of  VAT  recoverable  from,  or  payable  to,  the 
taxation authority is included as part of receivables or payables 
in the balance sheet.

Investments in subsidiaries 

Investments  denominated  in  foreign  currency  are  recorded 
using the rate of exchange at the date of acquisition.  

Investments  in  subsidiaries  and  associates  are  stated  at  cost 
less  any  provision  for  impairment  in  value.  Investments  are 
reviewed annually for evidence of impairment.

104

Provisions

Provisions  are  recognised  when  the  Company  has  a  present 
obligation as a result of a past event and management believe 
it to be probable that the Company will be required to settle 
that obligation.  Provisions are measured at management’s best 
estimate of the expenditure required to settle the obligation at 
the balance sheet date and are discounted to net present value 
where this is deemed to be material.

Share based payments

Employees  (including  directors)  of  the  company  receive 
remuneration in the form of share-based payment transactions, 
whereby employees render services in exchange for shares or 
rights over shares (‘equity-settled transactions’).

Equity-settled transactions

Share-based  payment  arrangements  in  which  the  Company 
receives goods or services as consideration for its own equity 
instruments  are  accounted  for  as  equity-settled  share-based 
payment transactions, regardless of how the equity instruments 
are obtained by the Company.

The  grant  date  fair  value  of  share-based  payments  awards 
granted to employees is recognised as an employee expense, 
with  a  corresponding  increase  in  equity,  over  the  period  in 
which  the  employees  become  unconditionally  entitled  to 
the awards.  The fair value of the awards granted is measured 
using  an  option  valuation  model,  taking  into  account  the 
terms  and  conditions  upon  which  the  awards  were  granted. 
The  amount  recognised  as  an  expense  is  adjusted  to  reflect 
the actual number of awards for which the related service and 
non-market vesting conditions are expected to be met, such 
that the amount ultimately recognised as an expense is based 
on the number of awards that do meet the related service and 
non-market  performance  conditions  at  the  vesting  date.  For 
share-based payment awards with non-vesting conditions, the 
grant date fair value of the share-based payment is measured 
to reflect such conditions and there is no true-up for differences 
between expected and actual outcomes.

The Company took advantage of the option available in IFRS 
1 to apply IFRS 2 only to equity instruments that were granted 
after 7 November 2002 and that had not vested by transition 
date.

Where  the  Company  grants  options  over  its  own  shares  to 
the employees of its subsidiaries it recognises, in its individual 
financial  statements,  an  increase  in  the  cost  of  investment  in 
its  subsidiaries  equivalent  to  the  equity-settled  share-based 
payment  charge  recognised 
its  consolidated  financial 
statements  with  the  corresponding  credit  being  recognised 
directly  in  equity.  Amounts  recharged  to  the  subsidiary  are 
recognised as a reduction in the cost of investment in subsidiary. 

in 

Annual Report 2015Financial Statements2 Tangible fixed assets

 Leasehold 
Improvements

Cost

 At 1 January 2015

 Additions

 Disposals

 At 31 December 2015

Depreciation

 At 1 January 2015

 Provided during the year 

 Disposals

 At 31 December 2015

Net book value

 At 31 December 2015

 At 31 December 2014

£m

 0.6

 –

 –

 0.6

(0.5)

–

–

(0.5)

 0.1

 0.1

 Computer 
Equipment

£m

 Fixtures  
& Fittings

£m

 1.6

 0.3

 (0.4)

 1.5

(1.0)

(0.4)

0.4

(1.0)

 0.5

 0.6

 0.4

–

 (0.2)

 0.2

(0.3)

–

0.2

(0.1)

 0.1

 0.1

 Total

£m

 2.6

 0.3

 (0.6)

 2.3

(1.8)

(0.4)

0.6

(1.6)

 0.7

 0.8

3 Investments in subsidiaries

Details of the investments in which the Company holds more than 20% of the nominal value of ordinary share capital are given in 
Note 10 of the Group financial statements.

Cost

At 1 January 2015

Additions

Disposals

 At 31 December 2015

Impairment

 At 1 January 2015

 Charge for the year

 At 31 December 2015

 At 31 December 2015

 At 31 December 2014

£m

 220.3

 4.8

 (2.0)

 223.1

 (20.4)

 (52.8)

 (73.2)

 149.9

 199.9

Additions in the year include share options granted to employees of subsidiary companies. 

Following a disappointing trading year in 2015 for the Company’s technology businesses, the Company has completed its 2015 
operational review.  The Company has determined that the carrying value of one of its subsidiaries is fully impaired by £52.8 million.  
This amount was recognised in the Company’s income statement in 2015.

105

Financial StatementsFinancial StatementsFinancial Statements4 Debtors

Debtors: Amounts falling due within one year

Trade debtors

Amounts owed by Group undertakings

Corporation Tax

Deferred income tax asset

Prepayments and accrued income

Debtors: Amounts falling due after more than one year

Amounts owed by Group undertakings

 2015
£m

 6.8

81.2

 0.8

 1.2

 3.7

93.7

 2015
£m

12.0

12.0

 2014
£m

 7.2

 55.1

 0.8

 1.2

 4.3

 68.6

 2014
£m

10.1

10.1

Accrued income is the value of unbilled work recognised on projects per the accounting policy outlined in Note 1.

The amounts recognised and unrecognised for deferred income tax are set out below:

 Recognised
2015
£m

 Unrecognised
2015
£m

Recognised
2014
£m

 Unrecognised
2014
£m

Depreciation in advance of capital allowances

Other short-term temporary differences

Share based payments

Tax losses

Net deferred income tax asset

 0.6

 0.1

 0.5

 –

 1.2

 –

 –

 –

 –

 –

Reconciliation of movement on deferred tax asset:

At 1 January

Deferred tax asset at 31 December

 0.6

 0.1

 0.5

 –

 1.2

 2015
£m

 1.2

 1.2

 –

 –

 –

 –

 –

 2014
£m

 1.2

 1.2

The Company has tax losses in net terms of £nil (2014: £nil) that may be available for use by offset against future taxable profits. 
Deferred tax assets have not been recognised in respect of these losses as the company cannot foresee profitability with sufficient 
certainty.

5 Creditors

Creditors: amounts falling due within one year

Trade creditors

Amounts owed to Group undertakings

Corporation tax

Other taxes and social security costs

Other creditors

Accruals and deferred income

106

 2015
£m

1.5

107.4

1.6

0.4

0.5

9.5

 2014
£m

1.9

120.6

0.7

0.3

0.5

8.0

120.9

132.0

Annual Report 2015Financial Statements6 Interest bearing loans and borrowings

Creditors: amounts falling due within one year

Instalments due on bank loans

Creditors: amounts falling due after one year

Instalments due on bank loans

 2015
£m

–

 2015
£m

 4.6

 2014
£m

 9.0

 2014
£m

–

During the year, the Company repaid its borrowings from Royal Bank of Scotland.  On 3 August 2015, the Group signed a new 5 year 
£25 million revolving credit facility with HSBC plc, expiring on 2 August 2020. The agreement includes the provision of a £25 million 
Accordian (uncommitted) facility. The Group drew down £4.8 million of new borrowings and the balance sheet amount is stated net 
of £0.2 million arrangement and related fees. 

Draw downs under the £25 million revolving credit facility are repayable in one, three and six month instalments and amounts can 
be redrawn at any time as long as covenant and other conditions are met. Accordingly drawdowns under this facility have been 
categorised as non-current. The loan bears interest at LIBOR+ margin, the margin varying between 1.15% and 1.9% depending on 
the ratio of the Group’s total net debt to its adjusted earnings before interest, tax, depreciation and amortisation. The Company and 
a number of subsidiaries have entered into cross guarantee arrangements to secure the drawings under this facility.

 2015
£m

 0.4

0.4

 2015
£m

 0.3

 2.1

 2.4

 2014
£m

 0.5

0.5

 2014
£m

 0.3

 2.5

 2.8

7 Creditors

Creditors: amounts falling due after more than one year

Other creditors

8 Provisions for liabilities and charges

Property leases

Other

 Movement in provisions:

Property leases

Other

 Provision 1 
January 2015
£m

 Arising during  
the year
£m

  Released during 
the year
£m

 Utilised during  
the year
£m

 Provision 31 
December 2015
£m

 0.3

 2.5

 2.8

 –

 (0.2)

 (0.2)

 –

 (0.1)

 (0.1)

 –

 (0.1)

 (0.1)

 0.3

 2.1

 2.4

Property leases
The provision for property leases is in respect of leasehold premises, from which the Company no longer trades, but is liable to fulfil 
rent and other property commitments up to the lease expiry dates.  Obligations are payable within a range of one to seven years. 
Amounts provided are management’s best estimate of the likely future cash outflows. The provision has been discounted using 
market interest rates. The undiscounted provision is £0.3 million (2014: £0.4 million).

Other
Other provisions include a number of employee and legal amounts. Included in the above is a provision for £1.4 million (2014: £1.4 
million) for ongoing litigation related to a former Trados shareholder’s claim of breach of fiduciary duty by the former Trados Directors 
on the sale of Trados to SDL in 2005. The Company paid $1.85 million in full and final settlement of this litigation on February 2016.

107

Financial StatementsFinancial StatementsFinancial Statements 
9 Share capital

Allotted, called up and fully paid

Ordinary shares of 1p each

At 1 January  2015

Issued on exercise of share options

Issued on exercise of LTIPS

Issued as payment of contingent consideration

At 31 December 2015

 millions

£m

 81.0

 0.1

 0.1

 0.1

 81.3

 0.8

 –

 –

 –

 0.8

The following movements in the ordinary share capital of the 
company occurred during the year:

1. 

 101,571  ordinary  shares  of  1p  each  were  allotted  under 
the  SDL  Share  Option  Scheme  (1999),  SDL  Share  Option 
Scheme (2010) and earlier Unapproved Option Schemes at 
a price range of 119 pence to 375 pence per share for an 
aggregate consideration of £264,321.

2. 

 138,205 ordinary shares of 1p each were allotted under the 
SDL LTIP 2011 Scheme.

3. 

4. 

 2,844 ordinary shares of 1p each were allotted under the SDL 
Save As You Earn Schemes for an aggregate consideration 
of £7,997. 

 In  March  2015,  87,068  ordinary  shares  of  1p  each  were 
allotted to four former shareholders of Bemoko Consulting 
Limited  as  final  payment  of  the  contingent  consideration 
due  as  a  result  of  the  acquisition  of  Bemoko  Consulting 
Limited by the group in 2013.

10 Commitments and contingencies

The future minimum rentals payable under non-cancellable operating leases as at 31 December are as follows:

 Within one year

 After one year but not more than five years

 More than five years

All amounts are attributable to equity holders of the parent.

Land and Buildings
2014
£m

   2015
£m

 1.0

 4.1

 0.2

 5.3

                1.0

 4.2

 1.2

 6.4

108

Annual Report 2015Financial Statements 
 
11 Share based payment plans 

During  2015,  the  total  share  based  payment  charge  amounted  to  £1.5  million  (2014:  £1.2  million).  Of  this  amount,  £0.3  million 
(2014:  £0.9  million)  has  increased  the  cost  of  investment  in  subsidiaries  as  the  relevant  share  based  payments  were  granted  to 
the employees of the subsidiaries. Total share based payments recharged to subsidiaries was £0.7 million (2014: £nil). Equivalent 
disclosures are made in the consolidated financial statements. 

12 Explanation of transition to FRS 101 from old UK GAPP

As stated in note 1, these are the Company’s first financial statements prepared in accordance with FRS 101. 

The accounting policies set out in note 1 have been applied in preparing the financial statements for the year ended 31 December 
2015 and the comparative information presented in these financial statements for the year ended 31 December 2014.

In preparing its FRS 101 balance sheet, the Company has not adjusted amounts reported previously in financial statements prepared 
in accordance with its old basis of accounting (UK GAAP) as the transition from UK GAAP to FRS 101 has not affected the Company’s 
financial position.

Amounts owed to group undertakings of  £23.7million  (2014: £24.8million) previously  included  in creditors:  amounts  falling due 
after more than one year were reclassified to creditors: amounts falling due within one year. This has affected the financial statement 
captions but not the financial statement position.

13 Profit attributable to members of the parent company

The profit dealt with in the financial statements of the parent Company is £0.6 million (2014: profit of £10.2 million).  No profit and 
loss account is presented for the Company as permitted by Section 408 of the Companies Act 2006. 

14 Post balance sheet events

There are no other known events occurring after the statement of financial position date that require disclosure.

109

Financial StatementsFinancial StatementsFinancial StatementsFive year group summary

Year Ended 31 December:

Turnover (notes 1, 2 and 3)

Growth in revenue

Operating profit before one-offs,  
depreciation and amortisation

Operating profit / (loss) 

Profit / (loss) before tax

Profit / (loss) after tax

Non-current assets

Cash and cash equivalents

Net current assets  less current liabilities

Total assets less current liabilities

Equity interests

Average number of employees (thousand)

Earnings per share – basic  
(adjusted for movements in capital)  
(notes 1, 2, and 3 )

Adjusted earnings per share (before one-offs, 
depreciation and amortisation)

Notes:

(1)  2011 – Acquisition of Calamares Holding BV Group

(2)  2012 – Acquisition of Alterian plc Group

(3)  2013- Acquisition of Bemoko Consulting Limited

 IFRS
2015
£m

266.9

2%

24.3

(25.1)

(25.2)

(30.7)

169.4

17.2

(0.6)

176.4

166.9

3.5

(37.93)p

 IFRS
2014
£m

260.4

-2%

21.5

9.7

9.4

6.6

210.0

22.1

(8.7)

208.3

202.1

3.2

8.03p

 IFRS
2013
£m

266.1

-1%

13.3

(24.0)

(24.4)

(27.9)

218.6

18.2

(17.9)

206.0

196.5

3.2

 IFRS
2012
£m

269.3

18%

41.0

27.7

27.4

20.9

243.3

28.5

(10.3)

239.0

227.8

2.8

 IFRS
2011
£m

229.0

13%

42.5

33.5

33.8

25.7

161.6

70.4

58.9

226.3

217.8

2.3

(34.78)p

26.12p

32.72p

16.13p

15.10p

2.57p

35.41p

38.23p

110

Annual Report 2015Financial StatementsCompany Information

Directors

David Clayton 

(Executive Chairman)

Dominic Lavelle 

(Chief Financial Officer)

Chris Batterham

Mandy Gradden

Alan McWalter

Glenn Collinson

Secretary

Pamela Pickering

Auditor

KPMG LLP

15 Canada Square

London

E14 5GL

Bankers

HSBC Bank PLC

Apex Plaza

Reading

RG1 1AX

Solicitors

DLA Piper 

3 Noble Street

London

EC2V 7EE

Registrars

Capita Registrars

Northern House

Woodsome Park

Fenay Bridge

Huddersfield

West Yorkshire

HD8 0LA

Stockbrokers

Investec Henderson Crosthwaite Corporate Finance

(a division of Investec Bank (UK) Limited)

2 Gresham Street

London

EC2V 7QP

N+1 Singer Capital Markets Ltd

One Hanover Street

London 

W1S 1YZ

Registered office

Globe House

Clivemont Road  

Maidenhead 

Berkshire

SL6 7DY 

Registered in England and Wales Number 2675207
www.sdl.com

111

Financial StatementsFinancial StatementsFinancial StatementsSDL is the leader in global content management and language translation software and services. We simplify the complexity of managing 
your  brand’s  business,  marketing  and  technical  content.  With  more  than  20  years  of  experience,  SDL  has  the  most  comprehensive 
language translation offering available.  

Seventy-nine of the top 100 global brands trust SDL to manage multiple brands, websites, languages and devices. SDL provides companies 
the scalability to achieve their global ambitions now and in the future. 

Go global faster with SDL. Learn more at SDL.com 

SDL plc
Globe House
Clivemont Road
Maidenhead
Berkshire SL6 7DY

t +44 (0) 1628 410100
f +44 (0) 1628 410150

www.sdl.com

Registered in England and Wales Number 2675207
Copyright © 2015 SDL plc. All Rights Reserved. All company product or service names referenced herein are properties of their respective owners.